JP2021194029A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the interest for a game.SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation. Operations of stop switches 42-44 then stop respective reels, a stop symbol combination according to a lottery result is stopped, and a put-out of medals is carried out. The slot machine has an advantageous section in which an indication function which gives a notification of a push order of a push order bell winning can be actuated, and a normal section in which such an indication function is not actuated. In the advantageous section, an AT mode advantageous for a player can be played. When the AT mode is executed in a preceding advantageous section and the AT mode is executed in a succeeding advantageous section, a specific notification is executed by which the player can recognize that the AT mode in the succeeding advantageous section is related with the AT mode in the preceding advantageous section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention includes, as a gaming state, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated and a second gaming state in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a specific state that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state and is configured to be capable of playing.
A specific determination means capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and a specific determination means.
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to the transition to the specific state, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific result is obtained, the specific state is transferred to the specific state. Specific state transition means and
A first game state transition means for shifting the game state to the first game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and
A first game state end means for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a first game state end means.
A second gaming state transition means for shifting to the second gaming state when the first gaming state is terminated by the first gaming state ending means, and
When the specific state is executed in the first game state and the specific state is executed in the first game state after the transition after the end of the first game state, the first game state after the first game state is executed. The specific notification that the player can recognize that the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the above-mentioned specific state is related to the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the first gaming state. Specific measures that can be taken and
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a precursor mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st CZ lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the process for precursor mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transition to AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending AT mode. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transition to a CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for terminating the CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for managing the difference number. It is a flowchart which shows the process for clearing the number of sub-differences. It is a flowchart which shows the process for displaying the difference number of sheets. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the difference sheet image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the difference sheet image. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of an ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for displaying the difference number of sheets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of an ending effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of an ending effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of an ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the difference number display process which concerns on the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process which concerns on the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for executing the ending effect which concerns on the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-time effect setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of an ending effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for displaying the difference number of sheets. It is a flowchart which shows the process for clearing the 2nd sub difference number of sheets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect, the effect in AT mode, and the like. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect, the effect in AT mode, and the like. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect, the effect in AT mode, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ED execution determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for clearing the number of sub-differences. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow at the end of an advantageous section. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow at the end of an advantageous section.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an exciting pulse of 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th of the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line, As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination winning It is also understandable that different small role prizes have been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is awarded. If the 4th small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbol corresponding to the 4th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-up line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 3rd small winning combination winnings. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is awarded. If the fifth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is awarded. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a small mountain shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

"Bell" design on the left reel 32L, "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design or "youth" design on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" design, "white shell" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the 8th small winning combination is awarded. If the 8th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the 8th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are so-called missing roles, in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. "White 7" design, "Cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "Youth" design, "Red 7" design, "Watermelon" design, "Replay" design, "BAR" design, "BAR" design "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination prize to the 32nd small winning combination winning are stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination prize to 32nd small winning combination winning, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 10th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first re-game to the tenth re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

The second re-game and the third re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The fourth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 4th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 4th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the fifth replay, the left reel 32L "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. When the symbol corresponding to the 5th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the sixth replay, the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "replay" symbol And, the prize is established when it stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the seventh replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle replay tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 10th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th re-game prize or the 10th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, the "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 8th re-game or the 10th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 8th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 10th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 8th re-game prize and the 10th re-game prize. In the ninth re-game, the prize is established when the eighth re-game and the tenth re-game cannot be won, that is, when the omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 14) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 operates mechanically in conjunction with each other, and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, 3 virtual medals of 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the insertion is performed, the specified number of medals is set as two, and the specific number is set as two, two virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. Is put in. Further, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2 and the specific number is set as 3, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of cards is set to 3 or 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, 2 is provided on condition that there are credits. One virtual medal is inserted.

Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals.

Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, pay attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting the medal by the player, whereas the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The operation surface of the first credit insertion switch 56 is set to be larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of sheets out of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order display that informs the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player by changing the winning rate of the small winning combination. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a sub control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, the model name of the gaming machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the gaming state advantageous to the player and the non-advantageous state. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 14 and 15.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the sub control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a combination monitor 77, a sub control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 16), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, the sub-control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The sub control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the sub-control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the sub control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the sub control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 14) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the sub control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the sub-control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the sub control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, the sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process is performed. If an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, the bet command including the information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the sub control device 81 as the control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the sub-control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The sub-control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S208. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

<Lottery process>
Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for 2-bet games is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the flag for the gaming state set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is determined. Select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and it is for the normal gaming state. Select a lottery table. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 19) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (FIG. 20).

Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated each time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is regarded as the operation for confirming the set value, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the setting process of the winning probability is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 19 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a two-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see step S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is set. If you have not won, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, for example, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination are carried over. Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 19, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 in 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 in 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 in 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5). The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). (Probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless of each, it is about 1/184. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the first BB is 0. In the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, before the 1st BB is won, about 1.50 medals can be expected to decrease per game (net increase minus about 1.50), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carry-over state after winning the 1st BB, a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the 1st BB state (net increase number minus about 2.10).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal gaming state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C are used. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/181 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1 / 4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the second BB is 0. In the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, before the 2nd BB is won, a decrease of about 0.24 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 0.24), excluding the increase of the 2nd BB, and the 2nd BB. In the carry-over state after winning, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the second BB state (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when there is no determination target to be determined in step S308, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the sub control device 81. The command transmission to the sub-control device 81 is performed by the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (winning when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination will be displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB prize is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role and the 7th. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-game, the 3rd re-game and the 2nd re-game winning is set, priority is given so that each re-game winning is prioritized over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize for any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310. It is a process. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information set in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → right. When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The design arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that sections separated by 5 or more symbols are formed, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right will be described as an example. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. Further, the 18th small role symbol in the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any one of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop.

In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so that the symbols with a small number of sliding frames are stopped at the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "ark shell" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 frames), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, while the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper row, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small is won by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the possibility that the winning combination will be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination will be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 is won or the middle forward push bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and the 18th small winning combination is won. And even if it is a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for it and win a prize.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "ark shell" symbol, which are the third small role symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the same. Depending on the operation timing, the small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st small role prize, the 2nd small role prize, the 3rd small role prize, the 4th small role prize, the 5th small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in step S411, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line.
In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result correspondence processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the sub control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

<Medal payout process>
Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-gaming prize to the tenth re-game winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed so that the game mode is set to the re-game mode. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when the current game mode is the re-game mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, the amount corresponding to the number of medals paid out is credited and given to the player.

If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

<Bonus state processing>
Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not these are the first BB state and the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes are not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB winnings is established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning is established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "90" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the following step S509, the first BB start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The first BB start command is a command for causing the sub control device 81 to know that the first BB state is started, and the sub control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the sub control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 or the like so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of bets in the above game, and the number of bets that can start the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the game can be started). It corresponds to the number of possible bets). That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bets are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "90" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, the second BB winning flag is cleared in step S512, and the second BB state flag is set in step S513. After that, in step S514, the second BB start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the sub control device 81 to know that the second BB state is started. The sub control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and the second game is started from the next game. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed.

The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, not only in the first BB state, but also in the second BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the second BB state is performed in the three-bet game.

In the present embodiment, the BB counter (upper limit payout number) is set to the same value when the first BB prize is established and when the second BB prize is established, but these may be different values. For example, the value of the BB counter set when the first BB prize is established may be larger than that when the second BB prize is established, or vice versa.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 24 shows an example of a lottery table for BB state. In the present embodiment, the lottery table common to the first BB state and the second BB state is used, but a separate lottery table is provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a normal Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1/596, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/1.31. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of plus or minus about 0.00), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/596, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/9.64. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/596 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as described above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table in which the medals can be reduced in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are exhausted will increase. It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination is established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if the common bell is won and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established, 13 cards will be paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is not 0 or less in step S517, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed in step S519, and the BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S520. More specifically, when the first BB state is terminated, the first BB end command is output and set, and when the second BB state is terminated, the second BB end command is output and set. The sub-control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the game can be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

<About playability using bet games and 3-bet games>
Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is won is a state called a so-called non-internal state. In this case, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and it is possible to play a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 2-bet game.

If the 1st BB combination or the 2nd BB combination is won and the winning game is not successful, the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even in the carry-over state, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and it is possible to play a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 3-bet game.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the state in which the first BB combination is won and the state in which the second BB combination is won, the former is referred to as "three-sheet internal state" and the latter is referred to as "two-sheet internal state". ".

In this slot machine 10, each reel 32L, 32M so that the 1st BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, while the 1st BB winning cannot be established in the 2-bet game in the internal state of 3 cards that have won the 1st BB combination. , 32R stop control is performed. In addition, in the internal state of the two reels that have won the 2nd BB role, the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game, so that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Control is done.

In other words, if you win the 1st BB role in the 3-bet game, you can win the 1st BB prize if you continue the 3-bet game, but if you switch to the 2-bet game after winning the 1st BB role, the 1st BB The prize cannot be established. In addition, if the 2nd BB role is won in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB prize can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the 2nd BB role is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the 2nd BB The prize cannot be established.

The 1st BB role and the 2nd BB role will not be won in duplicate, and the 1st BB role will not be won again in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over, and the 2nd BB role may be won in duplicate. No. For this reason, if a game is played in a 2-bet game in a situation where the three cards that have won the first BB role are in the internal state, the game in which the first BB winning is carried over will continue endlessly.

In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB winning combination will not be won again, and the first BB winning combination will not be won in duplicate. Therefore, if a game is played in a 3-bet game in a situation where the two cards that have won the second BB role are in the internal state, the game in which the second BB winning is carried over will continue endlessly.

Here, since the 1st BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, 3 in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the bet game, the 2nd BB prize will not be established, and if the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the 2nd BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the 1st BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over is carried over. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to use a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win another role at the time of the drop.

Further, in the first BB state that shifts due to the establishment of the first BB prize and the second BB state that shifts due to the establishment of the second BB prize, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing the medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44.

In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won, and the assist. It is possible to switch between a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) in which the above is not performed, and it is also possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, a game in a two-bet game is performed in a non-internal state, and the second BB combination is won in the two-bet game. When the second BB combination is won, the internal state (two-card internal state) is set, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the game in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over without winning the 1st BB role or the 2nd BB winning. Will be continued.

Here, the first BB winning flag for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp that the first BB combination is in the winning state (three internal states) is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The flag. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags of other roles are stored.

Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by the backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 will be left with various flags of the normal area stored before the power is cut off. It will be started. Therefore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off in the internal state of the three machines in which the first BB winning flag is set, and then the power is turned on, the slot machine 10 is started in the state where the internal state of the three machines is maintained. To.

However, when the winning probability setting process is activated (when the setting is changed) when the slot machine 10 is started up, the normal area initialization process (clear process) is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in these normal areas. Therefore, if the setting is changed after the slot machine 10 is started, the internal state of the three cards is cleared and the slot machine 10 becomes a non-internal state.

On the other hand, the second BB winning flag for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp that the second BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states) is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage areas 106d. This storage area is subject to backup processing when the power is cut off, like the normal area. Therefore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off in the internal state of the two machines in which the second BB winning flag is set in the storage area, and then the power is turned on, the slot is in the state where the internal state of the two machines is maintained. Machine 10 is started.

Unlike the normal area, the storage area is excluded from the data clear processing (initialization processing) when the setting is changed. Therefore, even if the setting is changed in the internal state of the two cards in which the second BB winning flag is set in the storage area, the second BB winning flag set in the area is not cleared. That is, the game is performed in the situation where the internal state of the two cards has been established under the set value changed by the setting change.

In this way, it is possible to continue the game in the two-card internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over, not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off, but also when the setting is changed. Then, once the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game (the internal state of 2 cards is established), after that, unless the 2nd BB winning is basically established and the 2nd BB state is established, the second BB state is established. The 2BB winning flag is stored in memory (the internal state of the two cards is maintained). By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably carry out the game in a state where the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Processing for lottery results>
First, the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. The lottery result correspondence process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the number of bets in the game to be started this time is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the grasped number of bets matches the specific predetermined number corresponding to the gaming state at that time. That is, in step S601, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is 2.

As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the first BB and the second BB, and in the internal state after winning the first BB and the second BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified bet number, and the first BB state and the second BB are set. In the state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific specified number (specified set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. If the number is not the specified specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (process for the instruction function) after step S604.

That is, in the present embodiment, where the specific specified number of non-internal states and internal states is 3, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is executed in the 2-bet game. Not done. Further, in the present embodiment, the specific specified number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, but in each of these BB states, 3 is set as the specified bet number, so that the 2-bet game is It is not executed, and the process for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state or the second BB state.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the two-bet game is played in the internal state, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate the normal game in which the second BB state is carried over.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence / absence of the push order notification (instruction function) or the like, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that this game is a game in the advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section. Will be done.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the game this time is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order Bell and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and the latest updated value of the counter is acquired in step S703. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not an out-of-order result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If the transition lottery has been won in step S705, the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26), if the advantageous section flag is set in step S604, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the AT mode is in progress, and is set at the time of transition to the AT mode.

If the AT flag is not set in step S606, the AT lottery process is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
The AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the AT lottery process, first, in step S801, the lottery result of this game, that is, the result of the winning combination lottery in steps S301 to S308 (whether or not the winning combination lottery is won, if winning, the winning combination) is grasped. In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. In the present embodiment, when the number of games (number of hamari games) that are not won in the AT mode transition lottery reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 700 games) while staying in an advantageous section, the AT mode Regardless of the result of the transition lottery, it is configured to transition to the AT mode. The ceiling counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games, and the process of step S802 has reached whether or not the number of remaining games has become 0, that is, the number of ceiling games has been reached. It determines whether or not it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S802 (when the value of the ceiling counter is not 0), the process proceeds to step S803, and it is determined whether or not any CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. A normal mode and a CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as a state in which the section is advantageous and before the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won. In the CZ mode, the winning probability of the AT mode is given preferential treatment over the normal mode. Mode (mode in which it is easy to win the lottery for transition to AT mode).

In the present embodiment, the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode are set as the CZ mode. The first CZ mode shifts by winning a transition lottery performed during the normal mode, and is a mode in which the player can play with high expectation for winning the AT mode. The second CZ mode shifts by winning the transition lottery performed at the end of the AT mode, and is a mode in which the player can play with high expectation for the re-winning (pull-back) of the AT mode.

A first CZ flag and a second CZ flag are provided as flags for the CPU 102 to know that it is staying in each of these CZ modes. The first CZ flag is for grasping that the mode is in the first CZ mode, and the second CZ flag is for grasping that the mode is in the second CZ mode.

If none of the CZ flags are set in step S803, that is, in the normal mode, in step S804, the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the normal AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the AT mode (winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, when any of the CZ flags is set in step S803, that is, in the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode, the corresponding CZ mode is set from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S805. Acquire the AT mode transition lottery table for. For example, in the case of the first CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery table for the first CZ is acquired. As shown in FIG. 29, also in the AT mode transition lottery table for the first CZ mode, the transition rate to the AT mode is set according to the lottery result of each game.

In the present embodiment, in both the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the first CZ mode AT mode transition lottery table, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, the normal lip C, and the chance eyes serve as triggers for the AT mode transition lottery. A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as the 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as the trigger of the AT mode transition lottery. However, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the 1st CZ, the AT mode transition rate when the chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, and watermelon are won is the normal AT. It is higher than the case of the mode transition lottery table, and the transition rate to AT mode is given preferential treatment.

The trigger of the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won, and the 3 bets carried over to the second BB. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as a game serve as a trigger.

After the execution of step S804 or step S805, the process proceeds to step S806 to execute the AT mode lottery process. In the AT mode lottery process, random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, the acquired random numbers, the lottery result grasped in step S801, and the AT mode transition acquired in step S804 or step S805. The AT mode win / fail lottery is performed using the lottery table. In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode is won in the AT mode lottery process of step S806.

Here, the AT mode is a mode in which push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. When the mode shifts to the AT mode and the push order notification is generated, it becomes possible to establish the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination at the time of winning each pushing order bell. In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT mode is plus about 5.95. In the AT mode, the initial number of games is set to 25, and by winning the additional lottery, the remaining number of games is added. When the number of remaining games becomes 0, the AT mode ends.

If the AT mode transition lottery is won in step S807, the process of clearing the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e (setting the value to 0) is executed in step S808. After the execution of step S808 or when a positive determination is made in step S802 (when the value of the ceiling counter is 0), the precursor mode setting process is executed in step S809. The precursor mode here is to wait for the transition to the AT mode while maintaining the winning state of the AT mode. Therefore, when the AT mode is won, the transition to the AT mode is performed after waiting for the end of the precursor mode. During the transition waiting period in the precursor mode, a notification effect for notifying that the AT mode has been won, a suggestion effect for inspiring a sense of expectation that the player has won, and the like are performed over a plurality of games.

In the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S901. The number of precursor games is the number of games that continue the precursor mode. In step S901, the number of precursor games is drawn using the precursor game number table acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The number of precursor games is not particularly limited, but for example, one game number can be drawn from the range of 3 games to 32 games.

In step S902, a value corresponding to the number of precursor games selected by the lottery is set in the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The precursor counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the precursor mode.

In step S903, the precursor mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The precursor mode flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the precursor mode is in progress. In the following step S904, the precursor start command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the precursor mode setting process is terminated. The precursor start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the precursor mode has been entered. The precursor start command includes information indicating the transition to the precursor mode and information indicating the value of the precursor counter (number of precursor games) set in step S902.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process (FIG. 29), after the execution of step S809, the AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S810. The AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode has been won. In the following step S811, the AT winning command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The AT winning command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the AT mode has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S807 (when the AT mode has not been won), the first CZ lottery process is executed in step S812, and then the AT lottery process ends. The first CZ lottery process is for performing a transition lottery to the first CZ mode.

Here, the first CZ lottery process in step S812 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not any of the CZ flags is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If any of the CZ flags is set, that is, if the player is staying in the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode, the first CZ lottery process is terminated as it is.

When none of the CZ flags is set, that is, in the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the precursor flags are set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the precursor flag is set, that is, when the precursor mode is in effect (when the CZ mode or AT mode has already been won), the first CZ lottery process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the precursor flag is not set (in the normal mode and not in the precursor mode), the process proceeds to step S1003, and the first CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the first CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the first CZ mode (winning probability of the first CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as a trigger for the first CZ mode transition lottery, normal rip A, normal rip B, normal rip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C are common. Bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the first CZ mode transition lottery.

The trigger of the first CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and the second BB is carried over, for example, the first CZ mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game serves as a trigger.

In step S1004, the first CZ mode lottery process is executed. In the first CZ mode lottery process, the lottery result (winning or winning of the winning combination lottery) grasped in step S801, the first CZ mode transition lottery table acquired in step S1003, and the lottery acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used. Using the counter, a lottery for shifting to the first CZ mode is performed. In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the transition to the first CZ mode is won in the first CZ mode lottery process of step S1004.

If the first CZ mode transition lottery has been won, the precursor mode setting process is executed in step S1006. The precursor mode here is to wait for the transition to the first CZ mode while maintaining the winning state of the first CZ mode. Therefore, when the first CZ mode is won, the transition to the first CZ mode is performed after waiting for the end of the precursor mode. The specific processing content in this step is the same as the setting processing of the precursor mode in FIG.

In step S1007, the first CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first CZ winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first CZ mode has been won. In step S1008, the first CZ winning command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The first CZ winning command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the first CZ mode has been won.

After the execution of step S1008 or when a negative determination is made in step S1005 (when the first CZ mode is not won), the first CZ lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26), if an affirmative determination is made in step S606 (when the AT flag is set), the AT addition process of step S608 is executed.

<Process for adding AT>
The AT addition process in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1101, the lottery result of this game is grasped. In step S1102, an additional lottery table for AT is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the additional lottery table for the AT mode, as shown in FIG. 33, the additional winning rate is set corresponding to each trigger of the additional lottery.

In step S1103, an additional lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the AT mode. In the additional lottery process, random numbers for the additional lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the acquired random numbers, the lottery result of the game grasped in step S801, and the additional lottery table acquired in step S1012 are used. The above lottery will be held.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the game number is won in the additional lottery process of step S1103. If the game number addition is won, the process proceeds to step S1105 to execute the addition game number addition lottery process. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery.

In the number of additional games table, as shown in FIG. 33, the number of additional games is set to be different according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, if the addition is usually triggered by Lip B, an average of 100 games will be added, while if the addition is triggered by Cherry A, an average of 15 games will be added. It is set so that the number of additional games will be larger when the additional games are made at the opportunity that it is difficult to win the lottery.

In step S1106, a process of adding the current number of additional games drawn by the lottery process for the number of additional games in step S1105 to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

In step S1107, an additional command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The addition command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode has been won. The additional command includes information indicating that the additional lottery has been won, as well as information indicating the number of additional games.

After the execution of step S1107 or when a negative determination is made in step S1104 (when the additional lottery has not been won), the AT addition process is terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process, an outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the sub control device 81, and the push order notification effect is performed by the sub control device 81.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. 34 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to turn on the light. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8 in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segments N1 to 7 display segments N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to display the symbols of a plurality of patterns individually on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8. A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, it is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is set. In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It forms a section display (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when the lighting state is set), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined (so that the illuminance is doubled). Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 35B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26), the process for notifying the push order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the AT flag is set. When the AT flag is set, that is, when the AT mode is in effect, the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is given in step S611 according to the type of the push order bell this time. Controls the instruction monitor 68 so that

In step S612, a push order notification command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the lottery result correspondence process is terminated. The push order notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 of the push order of the winning combination in the current game among the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination corresponding to the pushing order bell.

If a negative judgment is made in step S609 (when the push order bell is not won) or a negative judgment is made in step S610 (when not in AT mode), the push order notification should not be performed, and steps S611 and S612 Processing is skipped and the lottery result correspondence processing is terminated.

<Processing for winning results>
The process of dealing with the winning result in step S415 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as a part of the reel control process (FIG. 21), and is executed when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (at the end of the game).

First, in step S1201, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1201 to S1203 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process.

If an affirmative determination is made in each of the processes of step S1202 and step S1203, the game number update process is executed in step S1204. In the game number update process, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and the like are updated.

In step S1205, an AT mode transition process for starting the AT mode is executed, and in step S1206, an AT mode termination process for ending the AT mode is executed. In step S1207, a CZ mode transition process for starting the CZ mode is executed, and in step S1208, a CZ mode termination process for ending the CZ mode is executed. After the execution of step S1208, the winning result handling process is terminated. The details of steps S1204 to S1208 will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202 or a negative determination is made in step S1203, the processing after step S1204 is skipped and the winning result correspondence processing is terminated. That is, when the game is played with a bet number different from the specific specified number, the process of updating the number of remaining games such as the precursor mode and the process of shifting to the AT mode are not performed.

<Process for updating the number of games>
The process for updating the number of games in step S1204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The advantageous section flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section is in progress.

If the advantageous section flag is not set (if it is not in the advantageous section), the game number update process is terminated as it is. When the advantageous section flag is set (when the advantageous section is in progress), the process proceeds to step S1302, and the precursor mode process for updating the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is executed.

In the precursor mode processing, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined in step S1401 whether or not the precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If the precursor flag is set (in the precursor mode), the process proceeds to step S1402, and the values of the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are updated. Specifically, the value of the precursor counter is decremented by 1, and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is decreased by 1.

In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is 0. When the value of the precursor counter is 0, that is, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 0, the precursor flags set in the various flag storage areas 106d are cleared in step S1404. This ends the precursor mode.

In step S1405, a precursory end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81, and then the precursory mode processing is terminated. The precursor end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the precursor mode has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401 (when the precursor mode is not in progress), the precursor mode processing is terminated by skipping the processing after step S1402, assuming that the precursor counter should not be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1403 (when the value of the precursor counter is not 0 and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 or more), the processing after step S1404 is skipped in order to continue the precursor mode. And end the processing for the precursor mode.

Returning to the description of the game number update process (FIG. 36), after the execution of step S1302, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not any CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When any of the CZ flags is set (in the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1304, and the values of the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are updated. The CZ counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. In step S1304, the value of the CZ counter is decremented by 1, and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is decremented by 1.

After the execution of step S1304 or when a negative determination is made in step S1303 (when none of the CZ flags is set), it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. do. When the AT flag is set (when the AT mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S1306, the values of the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are updated, and then the game number update process is terminated. .. The AT counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode. In step S1306, the value of the AT counter is decremented by 1, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is decremented by 1.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305 (when the AT flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the AT winning flag is not set (when the AT mode is not won), the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is updated in step S1308. Specifically, the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1, and the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games is decremented by 1. After the execution of step S1308 or when a positive determination is made in step S1307 (when the AT winning flag is set), the game number update process is terminated.

<Process for transition to AT mode>
The process for shifting to the AT mode in step S1205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the AT flag is not set (when not in the AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

When the AT winning flag is set (when the AT mode is won), the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the precursor flag is not set (when the precursor mode is not set), the AT winning flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared in step S1504.

In step S1505, the AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the mode shifts to the AT mode. Since the AT mode transition process is executed at the end of the game, the AT mode is started from the next game.

In step S1506, a value corresponding to the initial number of games in the AT mode (for example, 25 games) is set in the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the following step S1507, an AT start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT mode transition process is terminated. The AT start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the AT mode has been entered. The AT start command includes information indicating that the AT mode has been entered, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the AT mode.

When affirmative judgment is made in step S1501 (when the AT flag is set), when a negative judgment is made in step S1502 (when the AT winning flag is not set), or when affirmative judgment is made in step S1503 (precursor flag is set). If), the process after step S1504 is skipped and the AT mode transition process is terminated.

<Process for ending AT mode>
The process for ending the AT mode in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If the AT flag is not set (if the AT mode is not in progress), the AT mode termination process is terminated as it is. When the AT flag is set (in the AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 1 or more, the AT mode termination process is terminated as it is in order to continue the AT mode.

When the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1603, and the AT flags set in the various flag storage areas 106d are cleared. As a result, the AT mode ends.

In step S1604, the AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The AT end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the AT mode has ended.

In step S1605, the lottery result of this game, that is, the result of the combination lottery in steps S301 to S308 (whether or not the combination lottery is successful or the winning combination) is grasped. In step S1606, the second CZ mode transition lottery table A is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the second CZ mode transition lottery table A, as shown in FIG. 41, the transition rate to the second CZ mode (winning probability of the second CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In this embodiment, chance eyes A, chance eyes B, chance eyes C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set as triggers for the second CZ mode transition lottery. .. Of these, for chance eyes A, chance eyes B, chance eyes C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, and watermelon, which correspond to specific roles (rare roles) that are difficult to win, the winning probability of the second CZ mode is set to 100%. Has been done. That is, when a specific combination is won in the final game of the AT mode, the second CZ mode is always won. The second CZ mode transition lottery table A shown in FIG. 42 is only an example, and the transition trigger to the second CZ mode and the transition probability (winning probability) can be arbitrarily set.

In step S1607, the second CZ mode transition lottery A is executed. In the second CZ mode transition lottery A, the lottery result grasped in step S1605, the second CZ mode transition lottery table A acquired in step S1606, and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used in the second CZ. A lottery for transition to the mode is performed. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not the transition to the second CZ mode has been won in the second CZ mode transition lottery A in step S1607.

If the second CZ mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1609 and the second CZ mode transition lottery B is executed. In the second CZ mode transition lottery B, the second CZ mode transition lottery table B is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the second CZ mode transition lottery table B and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used. Is used to draw a lottery for transition to the second CZ mode. In the second CZ mode transition lottery table B, the winning or losing of the second CZ mode is assigned to the counter value for the lottery regardless of the winning combination. Therefore, even if the trigger shown in FIG. 41 is not won in the final game of the AT mode, if the value assigned to the winning of the second CZ mode is acquired as the counter value for the lottery, the second CZ mode is won.

The winning probability in the second CZ mode transition lottery B is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, about 30%. That is, if a specific winning combination, a push order bell, or the like is won in the final game of the AT mode, the winning or losing lottery of the second CZ mode is given preferential treatment, and if there is no such winning, the second CZ mode is won with a certain probability.

In step S1610, it is determined whether or not the transition to the second CZ mode has been won in the second CZ mode transition lottery B in step S1609. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1610 or affirmative judgment is made in step S1608 (when the second CZ mode is won in the second CZ mode transition lottery A), the process proceeds to step S1611 and the second CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. set. The second CZ winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second CZ mode has been won.

In step S1612, the second CZ winning command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT mode termination process is terminated. The second CZ winning command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the second CZ mode has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S1610 (when the second CZ mode is not won), the process proceeds to step S1613, and the advantageous section end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section end flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section should be ended. After the execution of step S1613, the AT mode termination process is terminated.

<Process for transition to CZ mode>
The process for shifting to the CZ mode in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not any of the CZ winning flags is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If any of the CZ winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

When the precursor flag is not set (when the precursor mode is not set), it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the second CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the second CZ winning flag is set (when the winning state of the second CZ mode is set), the second CZ winning flag is cleared in step S1704.

In the following step S1705, the second CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode. Since the CZ mode transition process is executed at the end of the game, the second CZ mode is started from the next game.

When the mode shifts to the second CZ mode in this way, the AT mode shift lottery table for the second CZ mode is acquired in step S805 in the AT lottery process of FIG. 28. In this second CZ mode AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 41, the probability of transition to the AT mode is given preferential treatment over the normal mode AT mode transition lottery table (FIG. 29). Therefore, when the player shifts to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, it is possible to play with a high expectation for the re-winning (pulling back) of the AT mode.

In this embodiment, the transition triggers in the AT mode transition lottery table for the second CZ mode and the winning probabilities corresponding to each trigger are the same as those in the AT mode transition lottery table for the first CZ mode (FIG. 29). For example, the AT mode transition lottery table for the second CZ mode may have a higher winning probability corresponding to each trigger, and they may be different.

In step S1706, values corresponding to the initial number of games in the second CZ mode are set in the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The initial number of games in the second CZ mode is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, 50 games. In this case, the winning probability of the AT mode will continue to be increased for 50 games after the end of the AT mode.

In step S1707, the second CZ start command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the CZ mode transition process is terminated. The second CZ start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the mode has changed to the second CZ mode. The second CZ start command includes information indicating the transition to the second CZ mode, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the second CZ mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1703 (when the second CZ winning flag is not set), it means that the first CZ winning flag is set (the winning state of the first CZ mode). In this case, the process proceeds to step S1708 to clear the first CZ winning flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

In step S1709, the first CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the mode shifts to the first CZ mode. In step S1710, a value corresponding to the initial number of games in the first CZ mode is set in the CZ counter. The initial number of games in the first CZ mode is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, 15 games.

In step S1711, the first CZ start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the CZ mode transition process is terminated. The first CZ start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the mode has changed to the first CZ mode. The first CZ start command includes information indicating the transition to the first CZ mode, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the first CZ mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701 (when neither CZ winning flag is set) or an affirmative determination is made in step S1702 (when a precursor flag is set), the processing after step S1703 is skipped and the CZ End the mode transition process.

<Process for ending CZ mode>
The process for terminating the CZ mode in step S1208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not any CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If none of the CZ flags are set (when not in the CZ mode), the CZ mode termination process is terminated without executing the process after step S1802.

When any of the CZ flags is set (in the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode), the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0 in step S1802. Judge whether or not. If the value of the CZ counter is not 0 (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 1 or more), the process proceeds to step S1803, and whether or not the AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, that is, AT. Determine if you have won the mode. If the AT winning flag is not set, the CZ mode termination process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1802 (when the value of the CZ counter is 0), the process proceeds to step S1804, and whether or not the second CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. To judge. If the second CZ flag is set (in the second CZ mode), the second CZ flag is cleared in step S1805. That is, when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 games, or when the AT mode is won in the middle of the CZ mode, the second CZ mode ends.

In step S1806, the second CZ end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The second CZ end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the second CZ mode has ended.

In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the AT winning flag is not set, it means that the second CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1808, and the advantageous section end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section end flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section should be ended. After the execution of step S1808 or when a positive determination is made in step S1807 (when the AT winning flag is set), the AT mode termination process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1804 (when the second CZ flag is not set), it means that the mode is in the first CZ mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1809, and the first CZ flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared. As a result, the first CZ mode ends.

In step S1810, the first CZ end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the CZ mode end process is ended. The first CZ end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the first CZ mode has ended.

<Section display first process>
The section display first process of step S314 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as a part of the lottery process (FIG. 18), and is executed when the start lever 41 is operated (at the start of the game). The section display first process is a process of shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section and controlling an eighth display segment N8 as a section display.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the notification condition in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied, among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the advantageous section winning game flag is cleared in step S1904. Then, in step S1905, the advantageous section flag is set. As a result, the advantageous section is started (shifts to the advantageous section).

In step S1906, a process is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. The advantageous section game number AG is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games executed during the advantageous section.

In step S1907, a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games (for example, a value corresponding to 700 games) is set as an initial value of the ceiling counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1908, an advantageous section start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The advantageous section start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the advantageous section is started.

After the execution of step S1908, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1902 (in the advantageous section) or a negative judgment is made in step S1903 (when the advantageous section winning game flag is not set), the above various cases are performed in step S1909. It is determined whether or not the AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. When the AT flag is set (when the AT flag is set when the interval indicator is not displayed), it means that it is the start timing of the AT mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1910, and the display of the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8.

After starting the display of the section display in this way, if the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1911, and the display in the advantageous section is displayed. Execute continuous processing. Specifically, a process is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the section display first process.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909 (when the AT flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1912, and a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the process of step S1910 or step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1913, and the process of adding 1 to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1912 or step S1913, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1914. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the addition value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1915, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1914 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units including seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77A, a second display unit 77B, a third display unit 77C, a fourth display unit 77D, and a fifth display unit 77E as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77A to the fifth display unit 77E have individual light sources composed of LEDs, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, the combination monitor 77 can display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) individually, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1915, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1914 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77A to 77E on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1915, the section display first process is terminated.

It should be noted that the arithmetic processing in step S1914 may be configured to perform a process of rounding off a number having a fifth digit after the decimal point and then controlling the display of the combination ratio monitor 77. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, the first display unit 77A basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77A is not provided, the first display unit 77A is printed, and the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77A and the second display unit 77B by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
The second section display process of step S416 (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. This process is performed as a part of the reel control process (FIG. 21), and is executed when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (at the end of the game). The second section display process is a process of managing the number of games and the number of differences in the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S2102. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S2102, in step S2103, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S2103, the number of payouts (when none of the winning combinations are established and the number of payouts is 0, provided that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings). By subtracting the input number (number of bets) from (including) and adding the subtraction result to the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated. By the way, when the addition result becomes a negative value in the MY update process, the negative amount is rounded down and counted as 0 sheets. For example, if the value obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number is -3 and the value after the update (after addition) is -1 in the situation where the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY before the update is 2. Process as if the updated value is 0.

In the second section display process, the number of bets corresponds to the game state, as in steps S601 to S603 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26) and steps S1201 to S1203 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 36). The determination process of whether or not it is a thing is not executed. Therefore, the game is played for the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section) and the number of increase / decrease in the number of advantageous sections MY (the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the advantageous section from the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section). It is updated each time the game is played, regardless of the number of bets at the time. That is, the update process of the number of games executed in the advantageous section and the number of medals increased / decreased is performed even when the game is played with the number of bets set to 2 (when the game is played in a state where the number of bets does not match the specified specified number). Will be executed.

In step S2104, a game number command and a difference number command are set as output targets to the sub control device 81. The game number command notifies the sub control device 81 of the advantageous section game number AG updated in step S2102, and the difference number command notifies the sub control device 81 of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated in step S2103. It is a thing. Therefore, by receiving these commands, the sub control device 81 can grasp the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY recognized by the main control device 101.

In step S2105, the remaining game number management process is executed, and in the following step S2106, the remaining number management process is executed.

The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the total of the advantageous section game number AG (the number of advantageous section digested games), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode), and the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode) is , Understand whether the situation is greater than or equal to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section or greater than the maximum number of games. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. .. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. Know if there are more situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S2107, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S2108, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S2109, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed.

In step S2110, processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed. In the initialization process of the advantageous section information, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time are returned to the initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT winning flag, the AT flag, various CZ flags, and the like are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the counters for the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and RAM is cleared for the variables or parameters.

In step S2111, an advantageous section end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The advantageous section end command is a command that notifies that the advantageous section has ended and that the initialization process has been performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2107 (when the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit number of games and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S2112 and the various flag storage areas described above. It is determined whether or not the advantageous section end flag is set in 106d. If the advantageous section end flag is not set, the section display second process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section end flag is set, after clearing the advantageous section end flag in step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2108 to end the advantageous section. As described above, when the advantageous section end flag does not shift to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode (step S1613) and when the AT mode is not won in the second CZ mode (step S1808). Is set to. That is, in the advantageous section, (1) the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the number of MYs for increasing / decreasing the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, and (2) the AT mode ends without shifting to the second CZ mode. That is, (3) the second CZ mode is terminated without winning the AT mode, and the game is terminated. When the advantageous section ends, the section shifts to the normal section.

<About the display of the push order display and the section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described.

In the slot machine 10, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won by winning the 7th small winning combination 7 (common bell), the number of games to be executed in the advantageous section from the next game of the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established. Measurement (counting the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. Then, in the advantageous section, for example, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won and the winning notification and the AT flag are set so that the push order notification can occur, the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up. That is, the eighth display segment N8 is not always lit at the start of the advantageous section, but is lit at least in response to a state in which the push order notification is performed and the number of medals is expected to increase.

After that, in the situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the eighth display is completed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. Is finished. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the next game of the game that won the transition lottery to the advantageous section, while the push order notification is performed only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. appear. In other words, the push order notification does not occur in the section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off even in the advantageous section. That is, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is lit, at least the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed in the advantageous section (specific section, substantial increase section). It is possible to clearly grasp. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally enjoyed even though it is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being performed.

<About re-winning in AT mode>
There is a slot machine that grasps the medal difference number each time based on the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the AT mode and notifies it as the medal acquisition number. In such a slot machine, the player can refer to the notified number of medals won and recognize it as the achievement that he / she has won.

However, in the conventional slot machine, since the MY for increasing / decreasing the number of advantageous sections is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section, when the AT mode is resumed in the advantageous section after the transition after the end of the advantageous section. , The number of medals to be notified will be updated after initialization. That is, even though the player was lucky enough to be re-winned in the AT mode, the number of medals to be notified may remain small. In this case, there is a concern that the lack of medals due to the small number of medals won will be more impressive than the joy of re-winning the AT mode.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode is re-winned after the end of the advantageous section, the player is prevented from having an unsatisfactory impression. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for that purpose will be described in detail.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2502, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501, or after the process of step S2502 is executed, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 17). If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S2504.

When a negative determination is made in step S2503, or after the process of step S2504 is executed, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is a command other than the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process (FIG. 18). , CZ winning command, AT winning command, addition command, etc. set in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26). In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S2506.

When a negative determination is made in step S2505, or after the process of step S2506 is executed, it is determined in step S2507 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). There is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S2508 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S2507, or after the process of step S2508 is executed, it is determined in step S2509 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S418 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). In addition to the commands, the CZ start command, CZ end command, AT start command, AT end command, and the number of games set in the section display second process (FIG. 45) are set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 36). , There is a difference number command etc. In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S2510.

If a negative determination is made in step S2509, or after the process of step S2510 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2511, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2511, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S2511, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Settings for effects based on signals from sensors connected to (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, the process proceeds to step S2603 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the setting of.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (if the push order combination is not won), it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C and cherry A to cherry C And watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 41, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery result other than the specific combination.

If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2605. In the specific combination notification process, as shown in FIG. 48, whether or not any of the precursor start command, the CZ winning command, and the AT winning command is received as the start command of this time in steps S2701 to S2703. To judge. The case where these commands are not received means that although the player has won a specific role (a role that has a high expectation for the transition), he / she has not won the lottery for the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2704, and the execution lottery of the pseudo precursor mode is executed, in which whether or not the pseudo precursor mode is executed is drawn.

The pseudo precursor mode is a mode for making the player expect that the above transition has been made (in other words, whether the CZ mode or the like has been won), although the transition to the precursor mode has not actually occurred. .. In the present embodiment, the period of this pseudo precursor mode is used to execute a continuous effect for notifying a non-winning such as a CZ mode. As the number of continuous games in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode, a larger number of games than the number of continuous production games may be set. In such a case, a fanning effect (an effect other than the continuous effect) that makes the player expect the player to win is executed in the period before the start of the continuous effect. Although this fanning effect is performed in both the precursor mode and the pseudo precursor mode to some extent, it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the precursor mode and the pseudo precursor mode.

In step S2704, the execution lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the execution lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is performed using the acquired lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. conduct.

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery in the pseudo precursor mode in step S2704 has been won. If it is not won, it is assumed that the mode does not shift to the pseudo precursor mode, and the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2706, and the lottery process for the number of pseudo precursor games is performed. The number of pseudo precursor games is the number of games that continue the pseudo precursor mode. In step S2706, a lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games is performed using the pseudo precursor game number table acquired from the various table storage areas 182a and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The number of pseudo precursor games is not particularly limited, but as in the case of the precursor mode, for example, one game number can be drawn from the range of 3 games to 32 games.

In step S2708, a value corresponding to the number of pseudo precursor games selected by the lottery is set in the pseudo precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The pseudo precursor counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the pseudo precursor mode.

In step S2709, a pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and then the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. The pseudo precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo precursor mode is in progress, and when the value of the pseudo precursor counter becomes 0 (when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode becomes 0 games). It is cleared to.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2701, step S2702, or step S2703, it means that the player has shifted to the precursor mode or has won the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode or the AT mode. In this case, assuming that the mode does not shift to the pseudo precursor mode, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated without executing the process after step S2704.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 47), after the execution of step S2603, after the execution of step S2605, when a negative determination is made in step S2602 (when the push order notification command is not received) or negative in step S2604. If it is determined (when the specific combination has not been won), it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the additional command is received as the command at the start of this time.

If the addition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2607, and the addition effect setting process is executed. In the setting process of the addition effect, it is set so that the addition notification effect for notifying the occurrence of the addition of the number of games in the AT mode and the number of addition games is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. It should be noted that the execution mode of the addition effect is not limited to the one performed in the addition generation game, the one performed after a predetermined number of games from the generation game triggered by the addition generation, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a predetermined number (for example). It may include what is performed in the situation where there is only one game left (so-called post-addition production).

After the execution of step S2607 or when a negative determination is made in step S2606 (when the addition command is not received), the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2608. In the continuous production, a series of productions such as a battle production are performed over a plurality of games, and the winning or losing is notified in the final game, so that the presence or absence of winning in the CZ mode or the AT mode is notified. In step S2608, the continuous effect is set to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode. In the continuous production executed in the precursor mode, it is notified that the CZ mode or AT mode has been won in the final game, and in the continuous production executed in the pseudo precursor mode, the CZ mode is in the final game. And it is notified that the AT mode has not been won.

In step S2609, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed. In the bonus middle effect setting process, a process for performing the effect for the first BB state and the second BB state by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is executed.

In step S2610, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. In other start-time effect setting processes, for example, an effect that suggests a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Perform processing, etc.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S2510 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the CZ start command is received as the command at the time of total stop. If the CZ start command has been received, the CZ effect setting process is executed in step S2802. In the CZ effect setting process, a predetermined CZ effect is set to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like from the next game. As the setting of the CZ effect, the CZ mode start effect performed in the first game of the CZ mode and the effect during the CZ mode performed in the second and subsequent games are set.

At that time, when the first CZ start command (step S1711 in FIG. 42) is received as the CZ start command, it is set so that the first CZ mode start effect and the first CZ mode operation corresponding to the first CZ mode are performed. .. Among them, in the first CZ mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 53A, for example, a notification image for notifying the start of the first CZ mode such as "CZ mode start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the second CZ start command (step S1707 in FIG. 42) is received as the CZ start command, it is set so that the second CZ mode start effect and the second CZ mode operation corresponding to the second CZ mode are performed. In the second CZ mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), for example, a notification image 402 notifying the start of the second CZ mode such as "pull-back chance start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the predetermined character image 401. indicate. Further, in the second CZ mode production, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for example, together with the character image 401, an auxiliary display unit displays a notification image 403 for notifying that the user is in the second CZ mode such as "pull-back chance". Display at 65. In each of these effects, a difference number image (acquired number image) 411 showing the number of medals acquired (the number obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts) is displayed, and the details of the difference number image 411 will be described later. The difference number image 411 is not displayed in the first CZ mode start effect and the first CZ mode operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801 (when the CZ start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2803, and it is determined whether or not the CZ end command has been received as the current stop command. When the CZ end command is received, the predetermined CZ end effect is set to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like in step S2804.

At that time, when the first CZ end command (step S1810 in FIG. 43) is received as the CZ end command, it is set so that the first CZ mode end effect corresponding to the first CZ mode is performed. In the first CZ mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for example, a notification image for notifying the end of the first CZ mode such as "CZ mode end" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When the second CZ end command (step S1806 in FIG. 43) is received as the CZ end command, the second CZ mode end effect corresponding to the second CZ mode is set to be performed. In the second CZ mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), for example, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the notification image 404 that notifies the end of the second CZ mode such as "end of pullback chance". .. In the case of the end of the second CZ mode triggered by the winning of the AT mode, the effect during the second CZ mode is performed without setting the second CZ mode end effect.

After the execution of step S2802, after the execution of step S2804, or when a negative determination is made in step S2803 (when the CZ end command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2805, and the AT start command is received as the current stop command. Determine if it is. If the AT start command has been received, the AT effect setting process is executed in step S2806. In the AT effect setting process, a predetermined AT effect is set to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like from the next game.

As the setting of the AT effect, the AT mode start effect performed in the first game of the AT mode and the AT mode middle effect performed in the second and subsequent games are set. In the AT mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), for example, together with the character image 401, a notification image 421 that notifies the start of the AT mode such as "AT mode start" is displayed. Further, in the AT mode effect, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), for example, the character image 401, the notification image 422 that notifies that the AT mode is in the "AT mode", and the difference number image 411. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in the AT mode production, a notification image 423 that informs the number of remaining games in the AT mode, such as "the number of remaining games 40G", is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2805 (when the AT start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2807, and it is determined whether or not the AT end command has been received as the current stop command. When the AT end command is received, it is set in step S2808 that the predetermined AT end effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In the AT end effect, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), for example, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the notification image 424 notifying the end of the AT mode such as "AT mode end".

After the execution of step S2806, after the execution of step S2808, or when a negative determination is made in step S2807 (when the AT end command is not received), in step S2809, the difference number management process for managing the difference number is performed. Run. In the following step S2810, the difference number display process for displaying the difference number image 411 is executed. The details of the difference sheet management process and the difference sheet display process will be described later.

In step S2811, other all-stop effect setting processes are executed, and then all stop-time effect setting processes are terminated. In other other stop-time effect setting processes, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64. It is controlled or controlled so that the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is emitted from the speaker 64.

<Process for managing the difference number>
The process for managing the difference number in step S2809 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the game number command and the difference number command are received as the command at the time of total stop. These commands are set as transmission targets to the sub control device 81 in step S2104 of the section display second process (FIG. 45) executed by the main control device 101. Since these commands are transmitted at the end of the game, the CPU 181 can grasp that one game has been executed by receiving these commands. Further, the game number command includes information indicating the update result of the advantageous section game number AG in the main control device 101, and the difference number command includes the update result of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the main control device 101. Contains information to indicate. If the game number command and the difference number command have not been received, the difference number management process is terminated as it is.

When the game number command and the difference number command are received, the process proceeds to step S2902, and the latest advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated on the main control device 101 side is grasped based on the received difference number command. In step S2903, the value of the MY1 counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is grasped. The MY1 counter is for the CPU 181 (sub control device 81) to grasp the main difference number MY1 counted by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101.

In step S2904, the value of the MY1 counter grasped in step S2903 is subtracted from the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY grasped in step S2902, and the increase / decrease amount this time is grasped. In the following step S2905, the current increase / decrease grasped in step S2904 is added to the current value of the MY1 counter, and the MY1 counter is updated. As a result, the value of the MY1 counter becomes the same value as the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY on the main control device 101 side, and synchronization between the two is achieved.

In step S2906, the values of the MY2 counters provided in the various counter areas 183b are updated. The MY2 counter is for the CPU 181 (sub control device 81) to independently count the increase / decrease number of medals (sub difference number MY2) in addition to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY counted on the main control device 101 side. In the MY2 counter update process, the current increase / decrease amount grasped in step S2904 is added to the current value of the MY2 counter, and the current increase / decrease amount is reflected in the value of the MY2 counter. Details will be described later, but depending on the situation, the reset timing (clear timing) differs between the MY1 counter and the MY2 counter, so that these counters may have different values.

In step S2907, the value of the AG counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is incremented by 1 and updated. The AG counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the advantageous section game number AG.

In step S2908, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section end command is received as the command at the time of total stop. The advantageous section end command is a command for notifying that the advantageous section has ended. If the advantageous section end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2909, and the values of the MY1 counter and the AG counter provided in the counter area 183b are cleared. As a result, the values of each of these counters are initialized.

After the execution of step S2909 or when a negative determination is made in step S2908 (when the advantageous section end command has not been received), the sub-difference number clearing process for clearing the value of the MY2 counter is executed in step S2910. After that, the process for managing the difference number is terminated.

Here, the process for clearing the number of sub-differences in step S2910 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the process for clearing the number of sub-differences, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The count continuation flag will be described later.

If the count continuation flag is not set, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the AT end command is received as the current command at the time of total stop. The AT end command is a command for notifying that the AT mode has ended. When the AT end command is received, that is, when the AT mode is terminated, the process proceeds to step S3103, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets), or the advantageous section game number AG is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the AT mode is terminated when the number of games is reached.

If the AT mode ends when the upper limit is reached, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. As a result, the value of the MY2 counter (sub difference number MY2) is initialized. In step S3105, the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated. The count end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 has been completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103 (if the AT mode is not terminated when the upper limit is reached), the process proceeds to step S3106, and it is determined whether or not the second CZ winning command has been received as the command at the time of all stoppages this time. The second CZ winning command is a command for notifying that the player has won the second CZ mode transition lottery at the end of the AT mode.

If the second CZ winning command has been received, the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated as it is. That is, when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode after the AT mode ends, the MY2 counter clearing process in step S3104 described above is not executed. That is, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared, and the counting is continued even after the transition to the second CZ mode.

If the second CZ winning command has not been received, it means that the second CZ mode has not been won and the advantageous section ends with the end of the AT mode. In this case, in step S3107, a predetermined value is set in the continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuation counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the period (number of games) for continuing the count of the sub-difference number MY2, and in the situation where the value of the continuation counter is 1 or more, it is the case where the advantageous section ends. Also continues counting the sub-difference number MY2. The initial value (predetermined value to be set) of the continuation counter is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, 50 is set corresponding to the number of continuous games (50 games) in the second CZ mode.

In step S3108, the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The count continuation flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 should be continued. After the execution of step S3108, the sub-difference number clearing process is completed without executing the process of step S3104. That is, not only when the advantageous section is continued after the end of the AT mode by shifting to the second CZ mode, but also when the advantageous section is ended without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 Continue counting without clearing.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102 (when the AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S3109 whether or not the second CZ end command has been received as the current command for stopping all. The second CZ end command is a command for notifying that the second CZ mode has ended.

If the second CZ end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning command has been received as the start command in this game. If the AT winning command has not been received (when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode), the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, in the case of shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode, the count of the sub-difference number MY2 ends.

When a negative judgment is made in step S3109 (when the second CZ end command is not received) or when a positive judgment is made in step S3110 (when the second CZ mode is finished by winning the AT mode), the count of the sub-difference number MY2 is counted. As it should be continued, the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 (when the count continuation flag is set), the process proceeds to step S3111, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is decremented and updated by one. That is, after the count continuation flag is set in step S3108, the value of the continuation counter is subtracted by 1 for each game.

In step S3112, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter is 0. If the value of the continuation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3113, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning command is received as the start command in this game.

When the AT winning command is received, in step S3114, the count continuation flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is cleared. After that, the sub-difference number clearing process is completed. That is, if the AT mode is won within the period set as the predetermined value in step S3107, the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued thereafter.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3112 (when the value of the continuation counter is 0), it is assumed that the period for continuing the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 has expired, and the count continuation flag is cleared in step S3115. After that, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, if the period set as the predetermined value in step S3107 has elapsed without winning the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared by the end of the period.

<Process for displaying the difference number>
The process for displaying the difference number in step S2810 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the game number command and the difference number command are received as the command at the time of total stop. If these commands have not been received, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated as it is.

When the game number command and the difference number command are received, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the difference number display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The difference number display flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the difference number image 411 is being displayed.

If the difference number display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3203, and it is determined whether or not the AT start command has been received as the current stop all command. The AT start command is a command for notifying the transition to AT mode. When the AT start command is received, the difference number display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3204. In step S3205, the value of the MY2 counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is referred to, and the current sub-difference number MY2 is grasped.

In step S3206, the display setting process of the difference number image 411 is executed. As a result, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the difference number image 411, the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S3205 is displayed. Since the AT start command is transmitted at the end of the game immediately before shifting to the AT mode, the display of the difference number image 411 is started from the next game (the first game in the AT mode).

After the execution of step S3206, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3203 (when the AT start command is not received), that is, when the AT mode is not entered, the difference number image 411 is not displayed, and the processing after step S3204 is skipped and the difference is made. The process for displaying the number of sheets is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202 (when the difference number display flag is set), that is, if the difference number image 411 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3207, and the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Determine if it is set. If the count end flag is not set, in step S3208, the value of the MY2 counter in the various counter areas 183b is referred to, and the current sub-difference number MY2 is grasped.

In step S3209, the difference number image 411 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated based on the grasping result of step S3208. Specifically, the display mode of the difference number image 411 is changed so that the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S3208 is displayed. After the execution of step S3209, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3207 (when the count end flag is set), the process proceeds to step S3210, and the display of the difference number image 411 is set to end. As a result, the display of the difference number image 411 is erased from the auxiliary display unit 65. As described above, the count end flag is (1) the AT mode ends when the upper limit is reached, (2) the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode, and (3) the second CZ mode is entered. This is set when any of the conditions that the number of games set as a predetermined value is consumed without winning the AT mode is satisfied when the AT mode ends without doing so. Therefore, the display and update of the difference number image 411 is continuously performed in the period from the start of the display of the image 411 until any one of the above conditions is satisfied.

After the execution of step S3210, in steps S3211 and S3212, the difference number display flag and the count end flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared, and then the difference number display process is terminated.

<Flow of display processing of difference number image 411>
The flow of the display processing of the difference number image 411 will be described. First, a case where the mode shifts to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode and the AT mode is won again in the second CZ mode will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

When the AT mode is started at the timing t1, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the AT effect and displays the difference number image 411 notifying the number of medals won (FIG. 54). The difference number image 411 is a value of the sub-difference number MY2 independently updated by the sub-control device 81 separately from the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) updated by the main control device 101 corresponding to the advantageous section. Is reflected.

In the update process of the main difference number MY1 and the sub difference number MY2, the negative value is truncated and treated as 0. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 (d), when the player's medal has a negative value at the start timing of the AT mode, as shown in FIGS. 56 (e) and 56 (f), The update result of the main difference number MY1 and the sub difference number MY2 is 0. That is, at the start of the AT mode, 0 images are displayed as the difference number images 411.

After that, when the game in the AT mode is advanced, the sub-difference number MY2 gradually increases with the small winning combination such as the push order bell. Since the expected increase in the number of medals per game (net increase) in the AT mode is about 5.95, at the timing t2 when about 10 games have been consumed from the start of the AT mode, for example, FIG. 56 (g) is shown. As shown, 60 images are displayed as the difference number image 411.

When the AT mode ends at the timing t3 and the mode shifts to the second CZ mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the second CZ mode effect. Even in this second CZ mode effect, the difference number image 411 is continuously displayed (FIG. 55). However, in the second CZ mode, the net increase number becomes a negative value (minus about 0.64), and the value of the sub difference number MY2 decreases as the game progresses. Therefore, at the timing t4, which has been exhausted for about 15 games from the start of the second CZ mode, 140 images are displayed as the difference number images 411, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (h). Since the end of the AT mode is not a trigger for clearing the sub-difference number MY2 (reset trigger), the number of medals acquired by the difference number image 411 is the total number of medals from the start of the AT mode.

When the AT mode is won at the timing t5 in the second CZ mode and the mode shifts to the AT mode again, the AT effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT effect at this time, the difference number image 411 is displayed in the same manner as above. Since the end of the second CZ mode due to the winning of the AT mode is not a trigger for clearing the sub difference number MY2, the number of medals acquired shown by the difference number image 411 is the total number of medals from the start of the previous AT mode. Therefore, at the timing t6, which is about 10 games after the start of the AT mode, 190 images are displayed as the difference number images 411, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (i).

In the present embodiment, even if the AT mode ends, the advantageous section does not end when the second CZ mode is entered, and when the AT mode is won and the AT mode is re-shifted during the second CZ mode. Is configured so that the advantageous section continues as it is. Therefore, the advantageous section is not interrupted between the timing t1 and the timing t6, and the game is played in the advantageous section of 1. That is, since the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 is not cleared, the main difference number MY1 and the sub difference number MY2 have the same value. That is, although the difference number image 411 displays the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 independently updated by the sub control device 81, it displays the number of sheets matching the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. ..

Next, FIG. 57 shows a case where the advantageous section ends without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, then the AT mode is won within a predetermined number of games (50 games), and the AT mode is shifted again. It will be explained with reference to it. Since the flow from timing t1 to timing t2 is the same as in FIG. 56, the description thereof will be omitted.

If the AT mode ends at the timing t3 and does not shift to the second CZ mode, the advantageous section (advantageous section A) ends. Along with this, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 is cleared, and the main difference number MY1 on the sub control device 81 side is also cleared (FIG. 57 (e)). At that time, in the sub control device 81, the continuation counter is set to a predetermined value (50), and the update of the sub difference number MY2 is continued until the counter becomes 0 (negative determination in step S3106 of FIG. 51). (Flow when affirmative determination is made in step S3101). That is, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared at the timing t3, and the value at that time is inherited thereafter (FIG. 57 (f)).

When the AT mode ends and the mode does not shift to the second CZ mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a normal mode effect (an effect for a normal mode different from the second CZ mode effect). The normal mode effect is performed under the advantageous section (advantageous section B) after the transition after the previous advantageous section A is completed.

In the normal mode effect in the above case, as shown in FIG. 57 (h), the difference number image 411 based on the sub difference number MY2 is displayed. As described above, since the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared even if the previous advantageous section A ends, the number of medals acquired by the difference number image 411 is the AT mode performed under the previous advantageous section A. It is the total number of sheets from the start, in other words, the cumulative number of sheets that straddles the advantageous section. Therefore, at the timing t4, which is about 15 games after the end of the AT mode, 140 images are displayed as, for example, the difference number of images 411.

By the way, when the previous advantageous section A ends and shifts to the later advantageous section B, the normal section is temporarily shifted before the transition to the later advantageous section B. In the normal section, since the main control device 101 does not update the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, the sub control device 81 does not update the sub difference number MY2 either. That is, the display number of the difference number image 411 does not change in the normal section, but in the present embodiment, the difference number image 411 is displayed in the normal section even in such a state. As described above, the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of all the small winning combinations. Therefore, after the end of the advantageous section A, the advantageous section B after leaving the normal section within one game to several games. Move to.

When the AT mode is won at the timing 5 within a predetermined number of games from the end of the AT mode and the mode shifts to the AT mode, the AT effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT effect at this time, the difference number image 411 is displayed in the same manner as above. As described above, the number of medals acquired shown by the difference number image 411 is the cumulative number of medals acquired by inheriting the number of medals acquired in the previous advantageous section A. Therefore, at the timing t6, which is about 10 games after the start of the AT mode, 190 images are displayed as the difference number images 411, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (i). That is, even in the situation where the advantageous section A has ended, the same difference number image 411 as in the case where the advantageous section A has not ended (FIG. 56 (i)) is displayed.

If the predetermined number of games is consumed without winning the AT mode, the difference number image 411 is deleted when the final game is completed (when affirmative determination is made in step S3112 of FIG. 51). Flow, flow when affirmative determination is made in step S3207 of FIG. 52). At that time, in the final game, the sub-difference number MY2 at that time is displayed as the final acquisition number.

If the predetermined number of games is exhausted without winning the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared and the number becomes 0. On the other hand, since the advantageous section does not end, the update of the main difference number MY1 is continued. However, in the normal mode after the end of the AT mode, the net increase number becomes a negative value and the number of medals held does not increase, so the value of the main difference number MY1 (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) at the time when the sub difference number MY2 is cleared is It is expected to be 0. Therefore, the sub difference number MY2 and the main difference number MY1 have the same value, and at this point, there is no difference between the two.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Conventionally, there is a slot machine that notifies a player of the number of medals won (difference number) based on the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY so that the player can recognize it as a result of the game. However, since the increase / decrease number MY of the advantageous section is initialized with the end of the advantageous section, the player can reassign the AT mode in the later advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section after playing the AT mode. In that case, depending on the continuation status of the AT mode that was re-winned, the number of sheets indicated by the notification of the acquired number of sheets may remain small in the later advantageous section. In this case, there was a concern that the lack of medals would be emphasized rather than the AT mode being re-winned, giving the player an unsatisfactory impression.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, even if the advantageous section A ends, the sub-difference number MY2 is held without being cleared, and the renewal of the held sub-difference number MY2 is continued in the later advantageous section B. It is composed. In this case, since the update result in the later advantageous section B is derived by taking over the update result in the previous advantageous section A, the value of the update result even if the AT mode ends early in the later advantageous section B. Can be suppressed from staying small. Then, since the difference number image 411 is displayed based on the sub-difference number MY2 straddling such an advantageous section, it becomes easy for the player to notify the achievement that the player is likely to be satisfied with, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the display of the difference number image 411 straddling the advantageous section not only shows a large number of medals won in the AT mode as described above, but also the AT mode assigned in the later advantageous section B is the earlier advantageous section A. It can be said that it also fulfills the function of making the player recognize that it is related to the performed AT mode.

As described above, in the configuration in which the increase / decrease number MY of the advantageous section is initialized with the end of the advantageous section, the game is divided for each advantageous section. Therefore, even if the player wins the AT mode early in the later advantageous section after the advantageous section in which the AT mode is played is completed, each AT mode is perceived as independent. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the difference number image 411 associates the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section A with the AT mode in the later advantageous section, it is actually divided into the front and rear advantageous sections. Even if it is, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode is made to stay in a row or the AT mode is pulled back in one advantageous section. This makes it possible to suitably enhance the joy of the player.

In the display of the difference number image 411 straddling the advantageous section, the continuation of the difference number notified in the AT mode in the later advantageous section B is notified in the AT mode in the previous advantageous section A. Therefore, the display recognizes to the player that the content of the notification performed in the AT mode assigned in the later advantageous section B is related to the content of the notification performed in the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section A. It can be said that it is possible to make it.

The difference number image 411 is displayed not only after the AT mode is started in the later advantageous section B but also in the period after the end of the previous advantageous section A and before the transition to the AT mode in the later advantageous section B. It was configured to be done.

According to the above configuration, in the later advantageous section B, it is possible to shift to the AT mode in a state where the continuity of the notification corresponding to the update result inherited from the previous advantageous section A is maintained. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of medals won is continuously updated in one advantageous section even if the player is actually divided into the front and rear advantageous sections. Therefore, when the number of difference image 411 is increased by the AT mode in the later advantageous section B, it becomes easy for the player to have an impression that the achievement has been increased, and it is possible to preferably arouse the satisfaction of the player. Become.

The difference number image 411 is displayed even in the normal section (non-advantageous section) that shifts after the end of the advantageous section.

According to the above configuration, the display of the difference number image 411 is suppressed from being interrupted due to the transition to the normal section, and even if the normal section is interposed between the earlier advantageous section A and the later advantageous section B. , It is possible to ensure the continuity of the notification of the number of acquired sheets in both of these advantageous sections. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily noticing the interruption of the advantageous section through the interruption of the number notification, and it is possible to suitably exert each of the above effects by updating the sub-difference number MY2 straddling the advantageous section.

After the end of the previous advantageous section A, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted without winning the AT mode, the configuration is such that the sub-difference number MY2 held and continuously updated at the end of the previous advantageous section A is initialized. did. In other words, the sub-difference number MY2 is further maintained for the case where the AT mode is won within the predetermined number of games, and the continuation of the update is maintained.

For example, if the sub-difference number MY2 is inherited even when the interval between the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section A and the AT mode in the later advantageous section B is widened, the relationship between the two AT modes is diminished. There is a risk that the feeling of villainy will not be exhibited well. Further, since the update result of the sub-difference number MY2 changes in the decreasing direction from the end of the previous advantageous section A to the transition to the AT mode in the later advantageous section B, such a decrease state is maintained for a long period of time. When the player is notified through the difference number image 411, the decrease in the number of medals held is emphasized, and there is a concern that the player may have an unpleasant impression. In this respect, in this configuration, the sub-difference number MY2 is targeted for the case where the AT mode is won within a predetermined number of games after the end of the previous advantageous section A, that is, the case where the AT mode is re-winned relatively quickly. Since the takeover is continued, not only can the AT mode give the impression of being in a row, but it is also possible to prevent the decrease in the number of medals held from being emphasized.

A second CZ mode, which is easier to win in the AT mode than in the normal mode, is provided so that the mode can be shifted to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode.

For example, if the configuration is such that re-winning to the AT mode hardly occurs after the end of the AT mode, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the game after the end of the AT mode in the first place. Even if the difference number image 411 in which the difference number MY2 is continuously updated is displayed, there is a concern that the player's interest in the display remains low and the effect is not satisfactorily exhibited. In this respect, in this configuration, after the end of the AT mode, the second CZ mode may be shifted to a state in which it is easy to win the AT mode, so that the frequency of winning the AT mode again is secured to a certain extent. This induces a feeling of expectation that the AT mode will be reassigned after the AT mode ends, and it is possible to enhance the notification of the number of acquired sheets that is continued across the advantageous section.

In that case, when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, the advantageous section does not end even if the AT mode ends, and the advantageous section continues until the end of the second CZ mode, while the second CZ mode When the AT mode ends and the advantageous section ends without shifting to, the configuration is such that the initialization of the sub-difference number MY2 is avoided and held.

By continuing the advantageous section as it is when shifting to the second CZ mode after the AT mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of game breaks, and the sub-difference number MY2 updated during the AT mode continues in the second CZ mode. Will be updated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section ends due to the end of the AT mode without shifting to the second CZ mode after the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is held without being cleared even if the advantageous section ends, so that the AT mode is in progress. The sub-difference number MY2 updated to is taken over and will be continuously updated thereafter. With such a configuration, the sub-difference number MY2 update mode (number display mode in the difference number image 411) can be changed between the case of shifting to the second CZ mode after the AT mode and the case of not shifting to the second CZ mode. Can be standardized. As a result, when the advantage section is actually interrupted without shifting to the second CZ zone after the AT mode, it seems as if the chance state is the same as when shifting to the second CZ mode through the difference number image 411. It is possible to give an impression, and by extension, it is possible to make it easier for the player to feel that the AT mode in the later advantageous section B is generated by consecutive villas from the AT mode performed in the earlier advantageous section A. ..

The change amount of the medal difference number is grasped from the comparison between the previous advantageous section increase / decrease number MY and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, and the sub difference number MY2 is updated based on the grasped change amount. Specifically, in the sub control device 81, the main difference number MY1 corresponding to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY of the main control device 101 is stored, and based on the main difference number MY1 and the difference number command from the main control device 101. By grasping the change amount of the medal difference number and reflecting the grasped change amount in the current sub difference number MY2, the sub difference number MY2 is updated.

According to the above configuration, even if the values of the sub-difference number MY2 and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are different due to the difference in the initialization timing, the sub-difference number MY2 is made to follow the change in the medal difference number. Can be updated. As a result, the sub-difference number MY2 corresponding to the actual number of medals inserted (number of bets) and the number of payouts can be appropriately updated without being restricted by the advantageous section, and the difference number image 411 can be displayed well. It will be possible to do.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a pseudo ending effect based on the sub-difference number MY2. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 67. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 receives the command at the time of total stop from the main control device 101, and is executed instead of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 49. Is. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the difference number management process in step S2809, in step S3501, the ending effect setting process for controlling the start timing of the ending effect and setting the type of the ending effect to be executed is executed. do. In the present embodiment, as the ending effect, a plurality of types of ending effects including a normal ending effect, a pseudo ending effect, and a special ending effect are provided, and in step S3501, one of these is selected and executed. Set as a target. The details of each ending effect will be described later.

In step S3502, an ending effect execution process for executing an ending effect is performed based on the setting result of step S3501. In this process, execution control of the ending start effect, the ending effect, and the ending end effect is performed. In step S3503, a process for displaying the difference number of sheets for displaying the difference number of sheets image 411 is executed. After the execution of step S3503, the other all-stop effect setting process of step S2811 is executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process of step S3501 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the game number command and the difference number command are received as the command at the time of total stop. If these commands have not been received, the ending effect setting process is terminated as it is. When the game number command and the difference number command are received, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not any of the normal ED flag, the pseudo ED flag, and the special ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. judge. Details of each of these ED flags will be described later.

If any of the ED flags is set, the ending effect setting process is terminated as it is. If none of the ED flags is set, the process proceeds to step S3603, and the value of the AG counter in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is referred to to grasp the advantageous section game number AG. The number of games AG in the advantageous section may be grasped based on the number of games command received from the main control device 101.

In step S3604, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG grasped in step S3603 is equal to or greater than the number of ending games. The number of ending games is defined by the number of digested games from the start of the advantageous section, which is the game in which the ending effect should be started (the start timing of the ending effect). The number of ending games is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed over 25 games, and the ending is 1475 games obtained by subtracting these 25 games from the maximum number of 1500 games. It is set as the number of starting games.

When the number of advantageous section games AG is equal to or greater than the number of ending games, that is, when the ending effect should be started, the process proceeds to step S3605, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S3606, based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games can be reached while staying in the AT mode. Specifically, the number of remaining games in AT mode is compared with the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games, and if the former is greater than or equal to the latter, it is determined that the maximum number of games can be reached, and the former is less than the latter. If so, it is determined that the maximum number of games cannot be reached.

If the maximum number of games can be reached, the normal ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3607, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. The normal ED flag is for the CPU 181 to understand that the normal ending effect should be executed. In step S3607, the ending effect to be executed is set (determined) as the normal ending effect. The details of the normal ending effect will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3606 (when the upper limit number of games cannot be reached), the process of step S3607 is skipped and the ending effect setting process is terminated, assuming that the normal ending effect is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3604 (when the number of advantageous section games AG is not equal to or greater than the number of ending games), the process proceeds to step S3608, referring to the values of the MY1 counter and the MY2 counter in the various counter areas 183b, and the main difference number MY1. And the sub-difference number MY2 is grasped. Each of these counters is updated in the difference number management process in step S2809 (FIG. 50). The main difference number MY1 corresponds to the advantageous section game number AG (increase / decrease number of medals updated on the main control device 101 side corresponding to the advantageous section), and the sub difference number MY2 is produced separately from the advantageous section game number AG. It is an increase / decrease number of medals to be updated on the sub control device 81 side for use.

In step S3609, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S3608 is equal to or greater than the ending start number. The number of ending starts is defined by the number of medals increased from the start of the advantageous section for the game in which the ending effect should be started (the start timing of the ending effect). The number of ending starts is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, considering that 25 games are assumed as the number of continuous games for the ending effect, the upper limit increase number is 2400 to 150 (25 games). The number of endings is set to 2250, which is obtained by subtracting (× net increase of about 6).

If the main difference number MY1 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, the process proceeds to step S3610, and it is determined whether or not the ED completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The details of the ED flag will be described later.

If the ED flag is not set, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped in step S3611. In step S3612, based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3611, it is determined whether or not the upper limit increase number can be reached while staying in the AT mode. Specifically, the multiplication value obtained by multiplying the remaining number of games in AT mode by the net increase number (about 6) in AT mode is compared with the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number, and the former is the latter or more. If it is determined that the upper limit increase number can be reached, and if the former is less than the latter, it is determined that the upper limit increase number cannot be reached.

If the upper limit increase number can be reached, the process proceeds to step S3607, and the normal ending effect should be executed, and the normal ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Here, the normal ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

The normal ending effect notifies the end of the advantageous section, and is executed at the end of the ending start effect executed at the start of the ending effect, the ending effect executed after the start effect, and the ending effect. It consists of an ending production. In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 60A, the notification image 431 notifying that the ending effect such as "Ending" is started and the number of medals such as "Get more than 2250" are 2250. The notification image 432 that notifies that the number of images has been exceeded is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When the normal ending effect is started when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the number of ending games, the number of medals acquired at that time is displayed as the notification image 432.

In the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, the display mode of the notification image 432 is changed to display the notification image 433. Specifically, the display of the number of acquired sheets by numbers is deleted, and the display is changed to congratulate the arrival of the ending by, for example, the characters "celebration". This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the specific number of sheets after the ending effect is started.

Further, in the ending effect, the continuous ending effect performed over a plurality of games is executed until the number of digested games reaches a specific number of games (for example, 15 games). As the continuous ending effect, for example, a series of effects performed over a plurality of games such as a story effect is executed over the specific number of games. On the other hand, after the number of digested games reaches a specific number of games, a discontinuous ending effect that does not straddle the games is executed. As the discontinuous ending effect, an effect that is completed for each game, such as a digest effect that cuts out the highlights from other game effects, is executed.

Although it is possible to configure the entire ending effect as a continuous effect, if the end timing of the ending effect deviates from the assumed timing (at the end of 25 games) due to the winning situation of the push order bell, the continuous effect is in progress. It causes a situation where the ending production ends. In this respect, by configuring the latter half of the ending effect with a discontinuous effect, the ending effect can be ended without giving an unnatural impression to the player even if the end timing of the ending effect changes.

In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the auxiliary display unit 65 includes the notification image 433 and the notification image 434 that notifies the end of the ending effect (in other words, the end of the advantageous section) such as “Fin”. Display on.

Returning to the explanation of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 59), if a negative determination is made in step S3612 (when the upper limit increase number cannot be reached), it is assumed that the normal ending effect is not executed, and the process of step S3607 is skipped and the ending effect is produced. End the setting process.

If a negative determination is made in step S3609 (when the main difference number MY1 is less than the ending start number), the process proceeds to step S3613, and whether the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S3608 is the ending start number (for example, 2250) or more. Judge whether or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3613, that is, if the main difference number MY1 has not reached the ending start number and the sub difference number MY2 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, the medal is updated across the advantageous section. It means that the number of acquired sheets (see the flow when a negative determination is made in step S3106 of FIG. 51 and the flow when an affirmative determination is made in step S3101) has reached the ending start number.

In this case, the process proceeds to step S3614, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S3615, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games grasped in step S3614 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games. The predetermined number of games corresponds to the number of continuous games of the pseudo ending effect, for example, 25 games.

When the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3616. The pseudo ED flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo ending effect should be executed. In step S3616, the ending effect to be executed is set (determined) as a pseudo ending effect.

Here, the pseudo ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 61. The pseudo ending effect is to notify the end of the advantageous section in a pseudo manner, in other words, it is an effect that makes the player look as if the advantageous section has ended, although the advantageous section has not actually ended. be. This pseudo ending effect is composed of an ending start effect executed at the start of the ending effect, an ending effect executed after the start effect, and an ending end effect executed at the end of the ending effect. Of these, the ending start effect is the same as that of the normal ending effect, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect of the pseudo ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the notification image 433 congratulating the arrival of the ending and the second difference corresponding to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) at that time. The number image 437 is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. Further, in the ending effect, a continuous ending effect is performed in the first half and a discontinuous ending effect is performed in the second half, as in the case of the normal ending effect. The continuous ending effect and the discontinuous ending effect at that time have the same contents as those of the normal ending effect.

In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the second difference number image 437 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the notification image 433 and the notification image 434 that notifies the end of the ending effect. At that time, the background image corresponding to the ending end effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the background image is the same as the background image displayed in the ending end effect of the normal ending effect. That is, the pseudo ending effect has the same appearance as the normal ending effect except that the second difference number image 437 is displayed.

Since the pseudo ending effect does not presuppose the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section does not end even if the pseudo ending effect ends, and the AT mode continues. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the pseudo ending effect is completed, the effect during the AT mode corresponding to the state in the AT mode is executed. In the AT mode production after the pseudo ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the difference number image 411 that notifies the number of medals won is displayed together with the notification image 422 and the character image 401 indicating that the AT mode is in effect. It is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The difference number image 411 at this time is based on the main difference number image MY1, in other words, corresponds to the continuation of the second difference number image 437 in the pseudo ending effect. Further, in the AT mode effect, the notification image 433 is displayed as a notification that the pseudo ending effect has been achieved.

Returning to the description of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 59), after the execution of step S3616, the ED completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3617, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. The ED completed flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo ending effect has been executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3613 (when the number of sub-differences MY2 is not equal to or greater than the ending start number) or when a negative determination is made in step S3615 (when the number of remaining games in AT mode is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games), a pseudo ending effect is executed. If not, the ending effect setting process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3610 (when the ED completed flag is set), it means that the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the ending start number after executing the pseudo ending effect. In this case, in step S3618, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S3619, based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3618, it is determined whether or not the upper limit increase number can be reached while staying in the AT mode.

If the upper limit increase number can be reached, the process proceeds to step S3620, and the special ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The special ED flag is for the CPU 181 to know that the special ending effect should be executed. In step S3620, the ending effect to be executed is set (determined) as the special ending effect.

Here, the special ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The special ending effect notifies the end of the advantageous section in a notification mode different from the normal ending effect and the pseudo ending effect. The special ending effect is also composed of an ending start effect executed at the start of the ending effect, an ending effect executed after the start effect, and an ending end effect executed at the end of the ending effect.

In the ending start effect of the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the notification image 432 for notifying that the number of medals won has exceeded 2250 and the notification image 433 consisting of the characters "celebration" are combined. For example, a notification image 441 that notifies that a special ending effect such as "Special Ending" is started is displayed.

In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 62B, the notification image 432 and the notification image 433 are put together to display, for example, a notification image 442 composed of the characters “2280 congratulations”. The number of medals won displayed in the notification image 442 is the number of medals at that time (main difference number MY1). Further, in the ending effect, a continuous ending effect is performed in the first half and a discontinuous ending effect is performed in the second half, as in the case of the normal ending effect. The continuous ending effect and the discontinuous ending effect at that time may have the same contents as those of the normal ending effect, or may have different contents in order to produce a special feeling.

In the ending end effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the notification image 442 that notifies the end of the special ending effect such as “Fin” (in other words, the end of the advantageous section) is provided as an auxiliary display unit together with the notification image 442. Displayed at 65. Further, in the ending end effect, the setting suggestion image 444 is displayed as a notification suggesting the current setting value.

Returning to the description of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 59), after the execution of step S3620, in step S3621, the ED completed flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. do. If a negative determination is made in step S3619 (when the upper limit increase number cannot be reached), the process of step S3620 and step S3621 is skipped and the ending effect setting process is terminated, assuming that the special ending effect is not executed.

<Processing for executing ending effect>
The process for executing the ending effect in step S3502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the game number command and the difference number command are received as the command at the time of total stop. If these commands have not been received, the processing for executing the ending effect is terminated as it is.

When the game number command and the difference number command are received, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the ED middle flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The ED in-progress flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the ending effect is being executed.

If the ED in-progress flag is not set, that is, if the ending effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3703, and it is determined whether or not any of the normal ED flag, the pseudo ED flag, and the special ED flag is set. .. If any of these flags is set, the corresponding ending start effect setting process is executed in step S3704. Specifically, when the normal ED flag is set, the start effect for the normal ending effect (FIG. 60 (a)) is set as the normal ending effect should be started. As a result, the start effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Since the game number command and the difference number command are transmitted at the end of the game, in step S3704, the start effect is set to be executed in the next game.

In step S3705, the ED middle flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the ending effect execution process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3703 (when neither ED flag is set), the process of step S3704 and step S3705 is skipped and the process for executing the ending effect is terminated, assuming that it is not the start timing of the ending effect.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3702 (when the ED in-progress flag is set), that is, if the ending effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3706, and the advantageous section end command is received as the command for all stops this time. Determine if it is. If the advantageous section end command has not been received, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, if the pseudo ending effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3708, and whether or not the number of digested games in the effect has reached a specific number of games (for example, 25 games). To judge.

If a negative decision is made in step S3708 (when the number of specific games has not been reached) or a negative decision is made in step S3707 (when the pseudo ED flag is not set), the digestion game in each ending effect is made in step S3709. It is determined whether or not the number has reached a predetermined number of games (for example, 15 games). If the number of games has not reached the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S3710, and the corresponding ending effect setting process is performed. For example, when the normal ending effect is being executed, the ending effect (FIG. 60 (b)) for the normal ending effect is set. Further, in the setting process of step S3710, the auxiliary display unit 65 is set so that the continuous ending effect (for example, story effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the process proceeds to step S3711 to perform the setting process of the corresponding ending effect. In the setting process of step S3711, the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to execute the discontinuous ending effect (for example, the digest effect). After the execution of step S3710 or step S3711, the ending effect execution process is terminated.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3706 (when an advantageous section end command is received) or affirmative judgment is made in step S3708 (when the number of digested games in the pseudo ending effect reaches a specific number of games), step S3712 is performed. Proceed and execute the setting process of the ending end effect corresponding to the ending effect being executed.

Since the ending effect execution process is performed based on the reception of the all-stop command sent when all of the reels 32L to 32R are stopped, it is said that the advantageous section end command is received in the determination process of step S3706. The timing of determination is the end of the game in the final game of the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S3712, the ending end effect is set to be executed by using the period from the end of the final game of the advantageous section to the start of the next game.

At that time, in order to prevent the next game from proceeding in the middle of the ending end effect, the main control device 101 freezes at the end of the final game of the advantageous section or at the start of the next game after the advantageous section ends. It is preferable to set the effect (the effect of waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 32L to 32R) to be executed, and execute the ending end effect using this freeze period. As a result, even if the start lever 41 is operated during the ending end effect, the reels 32L to 32R are not rotated until the ending end effect is completed, and the next game can be made to stand by so as not to proceed.

Further, in the situation where the pseudo ending effect is performed as the ending effect, the specific number of games is reached even when it is determined in step S3708 that the specific number of games has been exhausted (when it is determined that the end timing of the pseudo ending effect has been reached). Set so that the ending end effect is executed using the period from the end of the previous game to the start of the next game. That is, by starting the ending end effect for the pseudo ending effect at the same timing as the ending end effect for the normal ending effect, it is possible to prevent the pseudo ending effect from being easily found from the difference in the start timing.

However, since it is not possible for the main control device 101 to know that the pseudo ending effect is being executed or that the specified number of games has been reached, the freeze process as described above is not executed. Therefore, if the start lever 41 is operated during the ending end effect, the rotations of the reels 32L to 32R are started and the next game is advanced. At that time, the ending end effect may be terminated halfway according to the operation of the start lever 41 or the start of rotation of the reels 32L to 32R, or the ending end effect may be continued until the end even after the start of rotation of the reels 32L to 32R. good.

After the execution of step S3712, it is determined in step S3713 whether or not the special ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the special ED flag is set, that is, when the special ending is being executed, the privilege setting process corresponding to the special ending effect is performed in step S3714. This privilege is a special privilege only for the special ending effect, which is not given in the normal ending effect or the pseudo ending effect. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion image 444 suggesting the current setting value is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the privilege.

As the setting suggestion image 444, a plurality of types of images are provided, and for example, there are those suggesting a high setting with a setting value of 5 or more, those suggesting an odd number setting, and those suggesting an even number setting. For example, the setting suggestion image of the high setting suggestion is more likely to be displayed when the current setting value is 5 or more than the setting value of 4 or less, and the setting suggestion image of the odd number setting is the current setting value. When the set value is an odd set value, it is easier to display than when it is an even set value. In step S3714, a lottery table for drawing which setting suggestion image is to be displayed is acquired from ROM 182, and the acquired lottery table, the current set value, and the lottery counter (random value) are used. And draw lots of setting suggestion images.

After the execution of step S3714 or when a negative determination is made in step S3712 (when the special ED flag is not set), in step S3715, each ED flag and the ED middle flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a are set. Clear, and then end the ending effect execution process.

<Process for displaying the difference number>
The process for displaying the difference number in step S3503 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 64, the processing before step S3202 is the same as the processing for displaying the difference number according to the first embodiment (FIG. 52), and thus the illustration is omitted. Further, in FIG. 64, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 52, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3202 (when the difference number display flag is set), that is, when the difference number image 411 is being displayed, the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S3207. Is set or not. The count end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 has been completed.

If the count end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3801 whether or not any of the ED flags is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If any of the ED flags is set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the ED in-progress flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a.

When a negative determination is made in step S3802, that is, when any of the ED flags is set and the ED in-progress flag is not set, it means that it is the start timing of each ending effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3803 to set the mode of displaying the difference number. Specifically, the notification image 432 that notifies that the difference number image 411 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 has been erased and the number of medals acquired has exceeded 2250, and the notification image consisting of the characters "celebration". 433 and are set to be displayed in sequence. At this time, the notification image 432 is set to be displayed according to the ending start effect, and the notification image 433 is set to be displayed according to the ending effect.

In step S3804, it is determined whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, when the ending effect to be executed is a pseudo ending effect, in step S3805, the values of the MY1 counters in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 are referred to, and the main difference number MY1 To grasp.

In step S3806, the display setting process of the second difference number image 437 is executed. In the second difference number image 437, the number of sheets corresponding to the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S3805, in other words, the number of sheets corresponding to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the advantageous section this time is displayed. In the display setting process of the second difference number image 437, the second difference number image 437 is set to be displayed according to the ending effect.

After the execution of step S3806, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3804 (when the pseudo ED flag is not set), it is assumed that the second difference number image 437 is not displayed, and the processing of step S3805 and step S3806 is skipped and the difference number display processing is performed. finish.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 (when the ED in-progress flag is set), that is, when each ending effect is being executed, the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3807. Determine if it is. When the pseudo ED flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3808, the value of the MY1 counter in the various counter areas 183b is referred to, and the current main difference number MY1 is grasped. In step S3809, the second difference number image 437 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated based on the grasping result of step S3808. Specifically, the image 437 is changed so that the second difference number image 437 of the number corresponding to the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S3808 is displayed.

After the execution of step S3809, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3807 (when the pseudo ED flag is not set), the processing of step S3808 and step S3809 is skipped and the difference number display processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801 (when neither ED flag is set), the process proceeds to step S3810 to determine whether or not the ED completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the ED flag is set, the processes of step S3808 and step S3809 are executed. As a result, the second difference number image 437 is displayed / updated in the effect during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect.

On the other hand, when the ED completed flag is not set, that is, when the pseudo ending effect has not been executed, the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 are executed, and then the difference number display process is terminated. In step S3208 and step S3209, the update process of the difference number image 411 corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 is executed.

<About the flow of ending production>
The flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. First, refer to FIG. 65 for the case where the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 in a certain advantageous section and the count of the started sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number in the advantageous section. I will explain while.

When the AT mode is started at the timing t1, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the AT effect, and the difference number image 411 (FIG. 54) for notifying the number of medals won is displayed.

The difference number image 411 is independently updated by the sub control device 81 separately from the main difference number MY1 updated by the sub control device 81 in correspondence with the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101. The value of the difference number MY2 is reflected. However, the sub difference number MY2 at this point is 0 as in the main difference number MY1, and both have the same value.

After that, when the game in the AT mode is advanced, both the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) and the sub difference number MY2 increase with the small winning combination such as the push order bell (FIG. 65 (d), (E)). Then, at the timing t2, when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the ending start number without ending the advantageous section, the sub difference number MY2 also reaches the ending start number accordingly.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the normal ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the normal ending effect, first, the start effect corresponding to the start of the normal ending effect is executed. In this start effect, the number of medals such as "Get 2250 or more" has exceeded 2250 as corresponding to the notification image 431 notifying that the ending effect is started and the difference number image 411. The notification image 432 to be notified is displayed.

After the start effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the normal ending effect. In the ending effect, the notification image 432 that notifies the number of acquired sheets by numbers is erased, and the notification image 433 that notifies the arrival of the ending by characters is displayed. The broadcast image 433 does not necessarily have to be a character, but may be a pattern such as a character image or a symbol. Further, in the ending production, continuous ending such as story production is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the number of digested games reaches a predetermined number (for example, 15 games), and the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games. After that, a discontinuous ending effect such as a digest effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the upper limit increase number at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), the ending end effect corresponding to the end of the normal ending effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Will be executed. In the ending effect, the notification image 434 that notifies the end of the ending effect is displayed together with the notification image 433.

Further, at the timing t4, the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the upper limit increase number, and the initialization process (step S2110 in FIG. 45) is executed. As a result, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is cleared by the main control device 101, and the number becomes 0. In line with this, the sub-control device 81 also clears the main difference number MY1 and the sub-difference number MY2 (flow when affirmative determination is made in step S2909 in FIG. 50 and step S3103 in FIG. 51), and both are zero.

As described above, when the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 (initial value) and then reaches the ending start number without ending the advantageous section (when the upper limit increase is expected). Is usually executed as an ending effect.

Next, after the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 in a certain advantageous section, the advantageous section ends, and then before the number of games set as a predetermined value (for example, 50 games) is consumed. The case of shifting to the AT mode again will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

By the way, in the sub-difference number MY2, as described in the first embodiment, (1) the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reach the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number, and the advantageous section becomes. If it ends, (2) if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode and the advantageous section ends, (3) the AT mode ends without shifting to the second CZ mode and the advantageous section ends. In that case, after that, without winning the AT mode, the game is cleared (initialized) in any of the cases where the number of games set as the predetermined value is exhausted, and the update is continued in other situations.

When the AT mode is started at the timing t1, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the AT effect and displays the difference number image 411 notifying the number of medals won. After that, when the game in the AT mode is advanced, both the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) and the sub difference number MY2 increase with the small winning combination such as the push order bell (FIG. 66 (d), (E)).

When the AT mode ends without shifting to the second CZ mode at the timing t2, the advantageous section (advantageous section A) ends (FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c)). As a result, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 is cleared. Along with this, the main difference number MY1 updated by the sub control device 81 is cleared (FIG. 66 (d)). On the other hand, the sub-difference number MY2 updated by the sub-control device 81 is not cleared, and the value of the sub-difference number MY2 at that time is inherited thereafter.

If the advantageous section transition lottery is won after the advantageous section A is completed, the next advantageous section B is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed with all the small wins as an opportunity, and the winning probability is also 100%. Therefore, in FIG. It is shown in the figure.

When the AT mode is won at the timing t3, which is the timing within the predetermined number of games (for example, within 50 games) from the timing t2 at which the AT mode in the previous advantageous section A ends, and the mode shifts to the AT mode, the main difference number MY1 is again. And the number of sub-differences MY2 increases (FIGS. 66 (d) and (e)). At that time, the main difference number MY1 is cleared at the end of the advantageous section A, and the sub difference number MY2 is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section A, and the update is continued. It becomes. Specifically, in the sub-difference number MY2, the number of medals is larger than that of the main difference number MY1 by the amount of inheriting the medal increase in the previous advantageous section A.

For example, at timing t2, the advantageous section A ends when the main difference number MY1 and the sub difference number MY2 are 400, and then 10 players are in the section up to the timing t3 when the AT mode shifts to the advantageous section B. Assuming that the number of medals held is reduced, the main difference number MY1 at the timing t3 is 0, while the sub difference number MY2 is 390. In the period of timing t2 to timing t3, as described in the first embodiment, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on the sub difference number MY2.

When the AT mode of the advantageous section B is started as described above, the effect during the AT mode is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT mode effect at that time, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the character image 401, the notification image 422 that notifies that the AT mode is in the "AT mode", and the difference number image 411 are used. Is displayed. After that, when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number at the timing t4, the pseudo ending effect is executed. At this time, since the main difference number MY1 is smaller than the sub difference number MY2, the ending number has not been reached.

Initially, as a pseudo ending effect, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), a start effect having the same contents as the normal ending effect is executed, and after the start effect is executed, the ending effect is executed. In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the notification image 432 that notifies the number of acquired sheets by numbers is erased, and the notification image 433 that notifies the arrival of the ending by characters is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, based on the main difference number MY1 at that time, the second difference number image 437 corresponding to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the advantageous section B is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. By displaying the second difference number image 437 in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number MY corresponding to the advantageous section B. However, in the second difference number image 437, since the main difference number MY1 is smaller than the sub difference number MY2, the number of medals acquired corresponding to the pseudo ending effect (particularly the notification image 432 displayed in the ending start effect). It is inconsistent with the number shown by), and there is a concern that it may cause confusion for the player. Therefore, in the pseudo ending effect, it is preferable to make the second difference number image 437 less conspicuous than the difference number image 411. For example, the display size of the second difference number image 437 may be reduced by the notification image 432 in the ending start effect, or the display position may be closer to the end of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 than the notification image 432. ..

In the pseudo ending effect, continuous ending such as story effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games (for example, 15 games), and after the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games. Is a discontinuous ending effect such as a digest effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Then, when the number of digested games reaches the specific number of games (for example, 25 games) at the timing t6, the ending end effect corresponding to the end of the pseudo ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (h). In the ending effect, in addition to the notification image 433 and the notification image 434 that notifies the end of the ending effect, the second difference image 437 based on the main difference number MY1 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

At that time, since the advantageous section is not ended, the main control device 101 continues the AT mode as it is even if the ending end effect is performed and the pseudo ending effect is completed. Therefore, after the pseudo ending effect is completed, the effect during the AT mode is executed again. In the AT mode production at that time, as shown in FIG. 66 (i), the difference number image 411 based on the main difference number MY1 is used as an auxiliary display unit together with the notification image 422 and the character image 401 indicating that the AT mode is in progress. It is displayed at 65. Further, in the AT mode effect, the notification image 433 is continuously displayed from the pseudo ending effect.

As described above, when the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 (initial value) and then reaches the ending start number across multiple advantageous sections (when the upper limit increase number is expected to be reached). Is not a normal ending effect but a pseudo ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

Next, a case where the main difference number reaches the upper limit increase number after the pseudo ending effect is performed as described above will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Since the flow from timing t1 to timing t3 is the same as timing t4 to timing t7 in FIG. 66, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the main difference number MY1 reaches the ending start number (timing t4) in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect (AT mode of the advantageous section B), a special ending effect different from the normal ending effect or the pseudo ending effect is executed. Initially, as the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), the start effect for the special ending effect is executed. In this start effect, the notification image 432 that notifies that the number of medals won exceeds 2250 and the notification image 433 that consists of the characters "celebration", and the notification image 441 that notifies that the special ending effect is started. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of medals acquired by the notification image 432 is based on the main difference number MY1, in other words, the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section B.

After the execution of the start effect, the ending effect (FIG. 62 (b)) is executed. In the ending effect, the notification image 432 and the notification image 433 are erased, and the notification image 442 consisting of the characters "celebration" and the characters indicating the number of medals won in the advantageous section B is displayed. Further, even in the ending production for the special ending production, continuous ending such as story production is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games, and the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games. After that, a discontinuous ending effect such as a digest effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the main difference number MY1 reaches the upper limit increase number at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 67 (j), the ending end effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the special ending effect. In the ending effect, the notification image 434 that notifies the end of the ending effect is displayed together with the notification image 442.

Further, at the timing t5, the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 reaches the upper limit increase number, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is cleared. Correspondingly, the main difference number MY1 is cleared also in the sub control device 81. Further, in the sub control device 81, the sub difference number MY2 is cleared to 0.

If the advantageous section ends after the pseudo ending effect is executed and before the main difference number MY1 reaches the upper limit increase number, the special ending effect is not executed and the final acquired number is displayed by the difference number image 411. Is done. For example, if the operation shifts to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode and the advantageous section ends due to the end of the second CZ mode without winning the AT mode, the difference number image 411 in the second CZ mode end effect is used to finalize. The number of acquired cards will be notified. If the advantageous section ends without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, the difference number image 411 is displayed during the period from the end of the AT mode to 50 games (the period during which the continuation counter is updated). Is continued, the final acquired number is notified by the difference number image 411 in the final game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the later advantageous section B, the difference number image 411 based on the sub-difference number MY2 inherited and updated from the previous advantageous section A is displayed, and the pseudo ending effect is executed based on the sub-difference number MY2.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the advantageous section is actually interrupted and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the difference number image 411 and the pseudo ending effect are combined to reach the upper limit increase number. You can give the impression that you did. This makes it possible to arouse the satisfaction and achievement of the player.

When the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number, the pseudo ending effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, when viewed with reference to the difference number image 411, the execution timing of the pseudo ending effect matches the execution timing of the normal ending effect performed when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number. do. As a result, the pseudo-ending effect can be made to look more authentic, and it is possible to easily give the impression that the upper limit has actually been reached.

In that case, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is grasped, and the pseudo ending effect is executed when the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of games for which the pseudo ending effect is executed.

For example, if the pseudo ending effect ends in the middle or becomes shorter than the normal ending effect, it gives an unnatural impression, and the advantageous section may not actually end or the ending effect may be pseudo. There is a concern that it will be easier to understand. In this respect, in this configuration, since the pseudo ending effect is executed for the case where the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a certain number or more, it is possible to prevent the effect from ending in the middle or being limited shortly. This suppresses the impression of being unnatural and makes it possible to prevent people from easily realizing that it is a pseudo thing.

In the pseudo ending effect, the difference number image 411 is erased, and the difference number image 411 is configured to limit the notification of the number of sheets exceeding the upper limit increase number.

When the player knows in advance that the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY reaches the upper limit increase number, and the difference number image 411 indicates the number of sheets larger than the upper limit increase number, the player It gives an unnatural impression, and there is a concern that it will be easier to realize that the advantageous section has not actually ended and that the ending effect is a pseudo one. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification of the number of sheets exceeding the upper limit increase number is limited, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an unnatural state, and it is possible to make the pseudo ending effect look like the real thing. ..

The second difference number image 437 based on the main difference number MY1 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the player cannot recognize or have difficulty in MY of the actual increase / decrease in the number of advantageous sections corresponding to the advantageous section B. In addition, there is an advantage that the player can clearly grasp the next goal (the remaining number of sheets until the special ending effect) after the pseudo ending effect is completed.

When the main difference number MY1 (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) reaches the upper limit increase number after the execution of the pseudo ending effect, a special ending effect different from the normal ending effect or the pseudo ending effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to produce a special feeling of reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY via the pseudo ending effect, and it is possible to preferably arouse the player's sense of accomplishment.

Further, since the setting suggestion image 444 is displayed as a privilege grant when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number after the execution of the pseudo ending effect, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number. It is possible to give not only the enjoyment of the fact but also the enjoyment of reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY via the pseudo ending effect.

Here, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, in a slot machine that performs an ending effect (normal ending effect) in response to the end of the advantageous section, a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous section does not actually end. It can also be seen as performing an ending effect (pseudo ending effect). By the latter pseudo ending effect, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous section ends while the advantageous section does not actually end, and then the advantageous section can be continued. As a result, the joy and surprise of the player can be aroused, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The configuration is such that the pseudo ending effect is executed during the AT mode. In this configuration, since the pseudo ending effect is performed in a state where it is internally determined that the AT mode will continue even after that, the AT mode can be continued after the pseudo ending effect is completed. With such a configuration, from the player's point of view, it was thought that the AT mode would end with the end of the advantageous section due to the execution of the pseudo ending effect, but unexpectedly, the AT mode will continue thereafter. Can be made to look like. The AT mode can be expected to increase the number of medals possessed, and since it is a desirable game mode for the player, it is possible to effectively invite the joy and surprise of the player compared to the case where the advantageous section only continues. Become.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this modification, the continuation suggestion notification suggesting the continuation of the AT mode is performed during the execution of the pseudo ending effect. The second difference number image 437 is not displayed in the pseudo ending effect. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described in detail.

<Process for displaying the difference number>
The process for displaying the difference number according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81. This difference number display process is performed as part of the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 58) according to the second embodiment, and is executed in place of the difference number display process of FIG. 64. Is. In FIG. 68, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 64, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3202 (when the difference number display flag is set), that is, when the difference number image 411 is being displayed, the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S3207. Is set or not.

If the count end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3801 whether or not any of the ED flags is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If any of the ED flags is set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the ED in-progress flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a.

When a negative determination is made in step S3802, that is, when any of the ED flags is set and the ED in-progress flag is not set, it means that it is the start timing of each ending effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3803 to set the mode of displaying the difference number. Specifically, the notification image 432 that notifies that the difference number image 411 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 has been erased and the number of medals acquired has exceeded 2250, and the notification image consisting of the characters "celebration". 433 and are set to be displayed in sequence.

In step S3804, it is determined whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, when the ending effect of the execution target is the pseudo ending effect, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is grasped in step S4001.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games grasped in step S4001 is equal to or greater than the second predetermined number of games. This process determines whether or not the number of continuous games in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect is secured to a certain number or more, in other words, the AT mode ends immediately after the pseudo ending effect ends. It is to confirm whether it is in a state where it will end up. The number of the second predetermined games is not particularly limited, but in this modification, it is assumed that the number of initial games in the AT mode is added to the number of remaining games of the pseudo ending effect at that time. For example, when the number of remaining games of the pseudo ending effect is 25 games and the initial number of games in the AT mode is 25 games, 50 games are used as the second predetermined number of games.

If the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the number of second predetermined games, the process proceeds to step S4003, and the setting process of the AT continuation suggestion effect is executed. The AT continuation suggestion effect suggests (notifies) that the AT mode continues, and in the effect, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), for example, a notification image 451 such as "AT mode continuation" is assistedly displayed. Displayed in unit 65. The broadcast image 451 does not necessarily have to indicate the continuation of the AT mode by characters, but may indicate the continuation by a pattern such as a character or a symbol.

In the setting process of step S4003, an execution lottery for whether or not to display the notification image 451 is performed, and when the execution lottery is won, the notification image 451 is set to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. It should be noted that the notification image 451 may always be displayed without performing the execution lottery.

Further, in step S4003, the display timing of the broadcast image 451 is set. At that time, the period in which the broadcast image 451 can be displayed is the period after the affirmative determination in step S4002 in the execution period of the pseudo ending effect. In the display timing setting process, a lottery is performed at which timing (game) of the target period the notification image 461 is to be displayed, and the notification image 451 is set to be displayed at the timing selected by the lottery. It should be noted that the notification image 451 may be displayed in a predetermined game such as a game in which the affirmative determination is made in step S4002 without performing the display timing lottery process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 (when the ED in-progress flag is set), the process proceeds to step S4004, and it is determined whether or not the AT continuation suggestion effect is being executed. In this determination, for example, when the AT continuation suggestion effect is executed, the predetermined flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and whether or not the predetermined flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a. It can be done by determining whether or not.

If the AT continuation suggestion effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, when the pseudo ending effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4001 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode and set the AT continuation suggestion effect in the same manner as above. conduct. By executing the processing after step S4001 even in the middle of the pseudo ending effect in this way, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode is less than the second predetermined number of games at the beginning of the pseudo ending effect, the pseudo ending effect can be obtained. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode is added to the game being played and the number of remaining games becomes equal to or more than the second predetermined number of games due to the addition, the AT continuation suggestion effect can be executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4004 (when the AT continuation suggestion effect is being executed), it is assumed that the AT continuation suggestion effect setting process is not executed, and the difference number display process is terminated as it is.

<About the flow of pseudo ending production>
The flow of the pseudo ending effect according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69. Here, a case where the AT continuation suggestion effect is executed in the fifth game after the pseudo ending effect is started will be described as an example.

When the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number, the pseudo ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Initially, as the pseudo ending effect, a start effect having the same contents as the normal ending effect is executed (FIG. 61 (a)). After the start effect is executed, the ending effect is executed.

In the ending effect from the start of the pseudo ending effect to the fourth game, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the notification image 433 that notifies the arrival of the ending by characters is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At that time, unlike the ending effect (FIG. 61 (b)) according to the second embodiment, the second difference number image 437 corresponding to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the advantageous section B is not displayed. In this case, since the mode of the start effect and the ending effect is the same between the pseudo ending effect and the normal ending effect, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the two ending effects.

After that, when the fifth game is performed from the start of the pseudo ending effect, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the notification image 451 suggesting that the AT mode is continued is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, the player is notified of the continuation of the AT mode.

For example, if the player can easily identify that it is a pseudo ending effect, there is a concern that the continuation of the AT mode can be predicted at that time. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the normal ending effect and the pseudo ending effect, it is difficult to predict the continuation of the AT mode in advance. On top of that, since the notification image 451 suggesting the continuation of the AT mode is displayed, it is possible to suitably arouse the joy and surprise of the player.

When the pseudo ending effect is completed, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the effect during the AT mode. In the AT mode effect at that time, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the difference number image 411 based on the main difference number MY1 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, the number of medals won at that time (the difference number recognized by the main control device 101) is notified, and it is suppressed that the player cannot recognize the remaining number of medals until the special ending effect.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The pseudo ending effect is configured to perform a continuation suggestion effect that suggests the continuation of the AT mode. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the player himself has assigned the continuation of the AT mode in the middle of the pseudo ending effect. In particular, due to the nature of the ending effect, it is not possible to be notified of the continuation of the AT mode after that during the ending effect, so that the joy and surprise of the player can be suitably invited. In addition, there is an advantage that it is possible to promote the continuation of the game after the pseudo ending effect. That is, the player who predicts that the advantageous section (AT mode) will end after seeing the pseudo ending effect may stop the game when the pseudo ending effect ends, but the pseudo ending effect is actually an advantageous section. Since it is a pseudo-thing that does not correspond to the end of, there is a risk that the player will lose. In this respect, the continuation suggestion effect can promote the continuation of the game after the pseudo ending effect, whereby the player can be prevented from stopping the game and suffering a disadvantage.

In the pseudo ending effect, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is grasped, and when the grasped number of remaining games is equal to or more than the second predetermined number of games, the continuous suggestion effect is performed. For example, when the continuation suggestion effect suggests the continuation of the AT mode in the pseudo ending effect, if the AT mode ends early after the pseudo ending effect, there is a concern that the player may be discouraged. In this respect, in this configuration, the continuation suggestion effect is performed after the number of continuous games in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect is secured to a certain number or more. Therefore, when the continuation of the AT mode is notified by the continuation suggestion effect, the continuation of the AT mode is notified. It is possible to prevent the AT mode from ending early after the pseudo ending effect.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this modification, the pseudo ending effect is configured to suggest a special ending effect, or to perform a special ending effect instead of the pseudo ending effect. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described in detail.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70. This process is executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81. This ending effect setting process is performed as a part of the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 58) according to the second embodiment, and is executed in place of the ending effect setting process of FIG. 59. .. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 59, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S3604 (when the number of advantageous section games AG is not equal to or greater than the number of ending games), the process proceeds to step S3608, referring to the values of the MY1 counter and the MY2 counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the number of main differences. Grasp MY1 and the number of sub-differences MY2.

In step S3609, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S3608 is equal to or greater than the ending start number. If the main difference number MY1 is not equal to or more than the ending start number, the process proceeds to step S3613, and it is determined whether or not the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S3608 is equal to or more than the ending start number. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3613, that is, when the main difference number MY1 has not reached the ending start number and the sub difference number MY2 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, it means that it is the start timing of the pseudo ending effect. do.

In this case, in step S3614, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 can reach the upper limit increase number based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3614. Specifically, the multiplication value between the number of remaining games grasped in step S3614 and the net increase in the number of AT modes (about 5.95) and the remaining number up to the upper limit increase in the main difference number MY1 (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY). The number of sheets is compared, and if the former is greater than or equal to the latter, it is determined that the upper limit increase number can be reached, and if the former is smaller than the latter, it is determined that the upper limit increase number cannot be reached.

If the main difference number MY1 can reach the upper limit increase number, that is, if the special ending effect is to be executed after the pseudo ending effect, the process proceeds to step S4102, and the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is the third predetermined number. Determine if the number of games is greater than or equal to the number of games. This process confirms whether the period (number of games) from the end of the pseudo ending effect to the start of the special ending effect is sufficiently open.

For example, if a special ending effect is performed in a short period of time after the pseudo ending effect is completed, there is a concern that the player may be given an unnatural impression. Therefore, in this modification, depending on the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number, it is determined whether to perform the pseudo ending effect and then perform the special ending effect, or to perform the special ending effect as it is without executing the pseudo ending effect. It is supposed to be.

The third predetermined number of games is a threshold value for the distribution. The specific number of the third predetermined number of games is not particularly limited, but in this modification, the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is added to the number of continuous games (for example, 25 games) of the pseudo ending effect. The added value (for example, 75 games) is used.

If it is determined in step S4102 that the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number of games, a pseudo ending effect is performed and then a special ending effect is performed, and in step S4103, a special ending suggestion is performed. Performs production setting processing. The special ending suggestion effect suggests (notifies) that the special ending effect is performed, in other words, that the execution of the special ending effect has been achieved. In the effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (a). In addition, for example, a notification image 461 such as "waiting for SPending" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. It should be noted that the broadcast image 451 does not necessarily have to suggest the execution of the special ending effect by characters, and may suggest the above by a pattern such as a character or a symbol.

In the setting process of step S4103, an execution lottery for whether or not to display the notification image 461 is performed, and when the execution lottery is won, the notification image 461 is set to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. It should be noted that the notification image 461 may always be displayed without performing the execution lottery.

Further, in step S4103, the display timing setting process of the broadcast image 461 is performed. At that time, the displayable period of the notification image 461 includes the execution period of the pseudo ending effect and the execution period of the effect during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect as shown in FIG. 71 (b). And. In the display timing setting process, a lottery is performed at which timing (game) of the target period the notification image 461 is to be displayed, and the notification image 461 is set to be displayed at the timing selected by the lottery. It should be noted that the notification image 461 may be displayed in a predetermined game such as a predetermined game during a pseudo ending effect without performing the display timing lottery process.

After the execution of step S4103 or when a negative determination is made in step S4101 (when the main difference number MY1 cannot reach the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S3616, and the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. As a result, a pseudo ending effect is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102 (when the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is less than the third predetermined number of games), the special ending effect is performed as it is without executing the pseudo ending effect, and in step S4104. A special ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. As a result, a special ending effect is executed instead of the pseudo ending effect. In this case, the number of continuous games of the special ending effect is larger than the planned number of games (for example, 25 games), but the surplus is compensated for by the discontinuous ending effect such as the digest effect. After the execution of step S4104, the ending effect setting process is terminated.

<About the flow of ending production>
The flow of the ending effect according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

When the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the number of ending games, the number of remaining games in AT mode is grasped, and the main difference number MY1 (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) can reach the upper limit increase number based on the remaining number of games. It is determined whether or not there is. If it is reachable, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number of games (for example, 75 games), and if it is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number of games, a pseudo ending effect is executed. At the same time, the setting process of the execution suggestion effect of the special ending effect is performed.

In the above setting process, for example, when it is set to execute the above suggestion effect (display of the notification image 461) in a predetermined game in which the effect during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect is being executed, FIG. 71 (b) shows. As shown, the notification image 461 is displayed on the display screen in the AT mode effect on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the special ending effect will be executed later.

When the notification image 461 is displayed in the AT mode effect after the pseudo ending effect, the notification image 461 is not displayed in the period before that (execution period of the pseudo ending effect, etc.). Therefore, in such a period, it is impossible or difficult for the player to predict that the pseudo ending effect will be executed.

After that, when the main difference number MY1 reaches the number of ending games, a special ending effect is executed. Along with this, the broadcast image 461 is erased.

When the number of remaining games in the AT mode is less than the third predetermined number of games, a special ending effect is executed instead of the pseudo ending effect. That is, a special ending effect is performed without performing a pseudo ending effect. In this case, the execution suggestion effect (display of the notification image 461) of the special ending effect is not performed.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY can reach the upper limit increase number in the number of remaining games in the AT mode. This makes it possible to execute a pseudo ending effect based on the later special ending effect.

When it is determined that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY can reach the upper limit increase number based on the number of remaining games, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo ending effect according to the number of remaining games. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the number of the third predetermined number of games, and if the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the number of the third predetermined number of games, a pseudo ending effect is executed, and the number of games is less than the third predetermined number of games. In some cases, it was configured to execute a special ending effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that a plurality of ending effects are performed in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

When it is determined that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY can reach the upper limit increase number based on the number of remaining games, the execution suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special ending effect is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the achievement of the special ending at the stage of the pseudo ending effect at the earliest, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the joy of the player.

In this modification, the second difference number image 437 during the pseudo ending effect may be displayed as in the second embodiment, or may not be displayed as in the first modification.

<Modification 3>
Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. In this figure, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this modification, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is referred to during the execution of the pseudo ending effect, and the suggestion of the special ending effect and the switching to the special ending effect are performed. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described in detail.

<Processing for executing ending effect>
The processing for executing the ending effect according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72. This process is executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81. This ending effect setting process is performed as a part of the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 58) according to the second embodiment, and is executed in place of the ending effect setting process of FIG. 63. .. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3701 (when a game number command and a difference number command are received), it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the ED middle flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. .. When the ED in-progress flag is set, that is, when any of the ending effects is being executed, it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the advantageous section ends in the next game.

If the advantageous section does not end in the next game, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, when the pseudo ending effect is being executed, in step S4201, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In the following step S4202, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 can reach the upper limit increase number based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S4201.

If the main difference number MY1 can reach the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S4203, and it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is equal to or greater than the fourth predetermined number of games. The fourth predetermined number of games is an addition value obtained by adding a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) to the number of remaining games of the pseudo ending effect. For example, when the number of remaining games of the pseudo ending effect is 10 games, the number of 4th predetermined games is 60 games.

When the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is equal to or more than the fourth predetermined number of games, the setting process of the special ending suggestion effect is performed in step S4204. The special ending suggestion effect is to display the notification image 461 on the auxiliary display unit 65, similarly to the special ending suggestion effect according to the second modification.

In the setting process of step S4204, an execution lottery for whether or not to display the notification image 461 is performed, and when the execution lottery is won, the notification image 461 is set to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. It should be noted that the notification image 461 may always be displayed without performing the execution lottery.

Further, in step S4204, the display timing of the broadcast image 461 is set. At that time, the displayable period of the notification image 461 includes not only the remaining period of the pseudo ending effect but also the execution period of the effect during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect. In the display timing setting process, a lottery is performed at which timing (game) of the target period the notification image 461 is to be displayed, and the notification image 461 is set to be displayed at the timing selected by the lottery. It should be noted that the notification image 461 may be displayed in a predetermined game such as a predetermined game during a pseudo ending effect without performing the display timing lottery process.

After the execution of step S4204 or when a negative determination is made in step S4202 (when the main difference number MY1 cannot reach the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S3708, and has the number of digested games of the pseudo ending effect reached the specific number of games? Judge whether or not.

If a negative determination is made in step S4203 (when the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is less than the fourth predetermined number of games), the process proceeds to step S4205 and the setting process for switching the running pseudo ending effect to the special ending effect. To execute. Specifically, the pseudo ED flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and the special ED flag is set so that the special ending effect is executed. At that time, in order to make it easier for the player to understand that the special ending effect has been switched to, the start effect for the special ending effect is once performed, and then the effect during the ending is performed. After the execution of step S4205, the processing for executing the ending effect is terminated.

<About the flow of ending production>
When the game number command and the difference number command are transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 during the execution of the pseudo ending effect, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is grasped, and the main difference number is based on the remaining number of games. It is determined whether or not MY1 can reach the upper limit increase number. Then, when it is determined that the upper limit increase number can be reached, either the execution suggestion effect of the special ending effect or the switching from the pseudo ending effect to the special ending effect is performed according to the number of remaining games at that time. Is done.

Here, the game number command and the difference number command that trigger the process of grasping the number of remaining games and the process of determining whether or not the upper limit increase number can be reached are transmitted at the end of each game. Therefore, the above-mentioned grasping process and determination process are performed in each game.

For example, depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode at the start of the pseudo ending effect, although the main difference number MY1 does not reach the upper limit increase number, an additional lottery (additional number of remaining games in the AT mode) is performed during the pseudo ending effect. As a result of the increase in the number of remaining games due to the lottery), the main difference number MY1 may change to a state in which the upper limit increase number can be reached. In this regard, in this modification, since such a change in the state is monitored in units of one game, even if the number of remaining games increases in the middle of the pseudo ending effect, the execution suggestion effect of the special ending effect can be executed. , You can switch to a special ending effect.

The present modification may be carried out in combination with the above modification 2, or the present modification may be carried out instead of the above modification 2.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, after performing the pseudo ending effect, the effect for continuing the AT mode is performed, and then the effect during the AT mode is performed. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 81. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. This process is executed when the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 receives the command at the time of total stop from the main control device 101, and is executed instead of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 49. Is. In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the process for managing the difference number in step S2809, in step S5001, the ending effect setting process for controlling the start timing of the ending effect and setting the type of the ending effect to be executed is executed. do. In the present embodiment, as the ending effect, a plurality of types of ending effects including a normal ending effect and a pseudo ending effect are provided.

In step S5002, execution control of the ending start effect, the ending in-process effect, and the ending end effect is performed based on the setting result of step S5001. In step S5003, a process for displaying the difference number of sheets for displaying the difference number of sheets image 411 is executed. After the execution of step S5003, the other all-stop effect setting process of step S2811 is executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process of step S5001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 74, the processing before step S3604 is the same as the ending effect setting processing (FIG. 59) according to the second embodiment, and thus the illustration is omitted. Further, in FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 59, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S3604 (when the number of advantageous section games AG is less than the number of ending games), the process proceeds to step S3608, and the values of the MY1 counter and the MY2 counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 are referred to, and the main difference is obtained. The number of sheets MY1 and the number of sub-differences MY2 are grasped.

In step S3609, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S3608 is equal to or greater than the ending start number. If the main difference number MY1 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, the process proceeds to step S3610, and it is determined whether or not the ED completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The ED completed flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo ending effect has been executed.

If the ED flag is not set, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped in step S3611. In step S3612, based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3611, it is determined whether or not the upper limit increase number can be reached while staying in the AT mode.

When the upper limit increase number can be reached, the normal ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3607, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the ending effect to be executed is set (determined) as the normal ending effect. If it is not possible to reach the upper limit increase number, the process of step S3607 is skipped and the ending effect setting process is terminated, assuming that the normal ending effect is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3609 (when the main difference number MY1 is less than the ending start number), the process proceeds to step S3613, and it is determined whether or not the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S3608 is equal to or more than the ending start number. .. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3613, that is, if the main difference number MY1 has not reached the ending start number and the sub difference number MY2 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, the medal is updated across the advantageous section. It means that the number of acquired medals has reached the starting number of endings.

In this case, the process proceeds to step S3614, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S3615, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games grasped in step S3614 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (for example, 25 games).

When the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3616. As a result, the ending effect to be executed is set (determined) as the pseudo ending effect. In step S3617, the ED completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3610 (when the ED completed flag is set), it means that the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the ending start number after executing the pseudo ending effect. In this case, in step S5101, the ED completed flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect during the AT mode is continued without executing the special ending effect.

In the second embodiment, the ED flag functions as an opportunity to sort the types of ending effects to be executed, such as whether to execute a normal ending effect or a special ending effect. In the present embodiment, it functions as an opportunity to determine whether or not to execute the ending effect when the AT mode or the advantageous section ends when the MY for increasing or decreasing the number of advantageous sections reaches the upper limit increase number.

<Processing for executing ending effect>
The process for executing the ending effect in step S5002 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 75, the processing before step S3702 and the processing after step S3709 are the same as the ending effect execution processing (FIG. 63) according to the second embodiment, and thus the illustration is omitted. Further, in FIG. 75, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702 (when the ED in-progress flag is set), it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the advantageous section end command has been received as the command at the time of all stoppages this time. If the advantageous section end command has not been received, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183.

If the pseudo ED flag is set, that is, if the pseudo ending effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3708, and whether or not the number of digested games in the effect has reached a specific number of games (for example, 25 games). To judge. When affirmative judgment is made in step S3708 (when the number of digested games in the pseudo ending effect reaches a specific number of games) or when affirmative judgment is made in step S3706 (when an advantageous section end command is received), the game is being executed. Executes the setting process of the ending end effect corresponding to the ending effect.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect being executed is a pseudo ending effect. If the pseudo ED flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5202 to execute the setting process of the continuous effect.

Here, the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The continuation effect suggests (notifies) that the AT mode will continue. In other words, the above suggestion (notification) is performed after pretending that the AT mode ends by the pseudo ending effect. It is a production that makes it look as if the AT mode was pulled back by the player's own game. In the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a notification image 471 that notifies that the AT mode such as “it is still going on !!” does not end and continues. It should be noted that the broadcast image 471 does not necessarily have to indicate the continuation of the AT mode by characters, but may indicate the continuation by a pattern such as a character or a symbol.

In the continuation effect setting process, the continuation effect is set to be executed in the next game. That is, after the ending end effect for the pseudo ending effect is performed, when the player performs the bet operation and the start operation by the start lever 41 to execute the game, the continuation effect is set to be performed.

At that time, the start timing of the continuous effect is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, the timing of the start operation, in other words, the game start timing at which the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R is started. .. In such a configuration, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is switched at the moment when the player who thinks that the AT mode has ended due to the end of the pseudo ending effect operates the start lever 41, and the notification image 471 is notified. , Can arouse the surprise and joy of the player. If there is a wait for the start of rotation of each reel 32L to 32R when the start operation is performed, the wait may be performed at the timing when the start operation is performed, or the wait period ends and each reel 32L is completed. It may be performed at the timing when the rotation of ~ 32R is started.

Further, the start timing may be varied. For example, as the start timing of the continuous effect, a plurality of timings including the timing of the start operation and the timing delayed by a predetermined period are provided, and one of the timings is selected by lottery or the like. With such a configuration, when the continuation effect is executed at the latter timing, the player is made to think that the AT mode will not continue because the continuation effect does not occur at the start operation timing, and then the delay occurs. It is possible to show the continuous production at the right timing, and it is possible to more appropriately arouse the surprise and joy of the player.

The predetermined period (delay period) may be about several seconds or about several games. Further, the continuous effect may be performed in the game in which the push order bell (the role in which the push order navigation is displayed) is won after the pseudo ending effect is completed without setting the period. At that time, it is preferable that the above-mentioned continuous effect is performed before the display of the push order navigation. Any one of these delay timings may be applied, or may be applied in combination. By the way, the type of timing is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

Further, the execution period of the continuation effect is not particularly limited, but the continuation effect may be terminated before the end of the game as a specific period (for example, about several seconds) in one game, and the continuation effect may be completed. It may be the whole game period in the execution game of.

Returning to the description of the ending effect execution process (FIG. 75), after the execution of step S5202, the pseudo ED end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S5203. The pseudo ED end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo ending effect has ended.

After the execution of step S5203 or when a negative determination is made in step S5201 (when the pseudo ED flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S3715, and each ED flag and the ED middle flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a are set. Clear, and then end the ending effect execution process.

<Process for clearing the number of sub-differences>
Here, the sub-difference number clearing process in step S2910 in the difference number management process (FIG. 50) in step S2801 will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If the count continuation flag is not set, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the AT end command is received as the current command at the time of total stop. The AT end command is a command for notifying that the AT mode has ended.

When the AT end command is received, that is, when the AT mode is terminated, the process proceeds to step S3103, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets), or the advantageous section game number AG is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the AT mode is terminated when the number of games is reached. If the AT mode ends when the upper limit is reached, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. As a result, the value of the MY2 counter is initialized.

In step S3105, the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated. The count end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 has been completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103 (if the AT mode is not terminated when the upper limit is reached), the process proceeds to step S3106, and it is determined whether or not the second CZ winning command has been received as the command at the time of all stoppages this time. The second CZ winning command is a command for notifying that the player has won the second CZ mode transition lottery at the end of the AT mode.

If the second CZ winning command has been received, the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated as it is. That is, when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode after the AT mode ends, the MY2 counter clearing process in step S3104 described above is not executed. That is, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared, and the counting is continued even after the transition to the second CZ mode.

If the second CZ winning command has not been received, it means that the second CZ mode has not been won and the advantageous section ends with the end of the AT mode. In this case, in step S3107, a predetermined value is set in the continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuation counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the period (number of games) for continuing the count of the sub-difference number MY2, and in the situation where the value of the continuation counter is 1 or more, it is the case where the advantageous section ends. Also continues counting the sub-difference number MY2. The initial value (predetermined value to be set) of the continuation counter is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, 50 is set corresponding to the number of continuous games (50 games) in the second CZ mode.

In the following step S3108, the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The count continuation flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 should be continued. After the execution of step S3108, the sub-difference number clearing process is completed without executing the process of step S3104. That is, even if the AT mode ends without reaching the upper limit and the mode does not shift to the second CZ mode, the count is continued without clearing the sub-difference number MY2.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102 (when the AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S3109 whether or not the second CZ end command has been received as the current command for stopping all. The second CZ end command is a command for notifying that the second CZ mode has ended.

If the second CZ end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning command has been received as the start command in this game. If the AT winning command has not been received (when the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode), the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, in the case of shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode, the count of the sub-difference number MY2 ends.

When a negative judgment is made in step S3109 (when the second CZ end command is not received) or when a positive judgment is made in step S3110 (when the second CZ mode is finished by winning the AT mode), the count of the sub-difference number MY2 is counted. As it should be continued, the process for clearing the number of sub-differences is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 (when the count continuation flag is set), the process proceeds to step S3111, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is updated as one decrement. That is, after the count continuation flag is set in step S3108, the value of the continuation counter is subtracted by 1 for each game.

In step S3112, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter is 0. If the value of the continuation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3113, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning command is received as the start command in this game.

When the AT winning command is received, in step S3114, the count continuation flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is cleared. After that, the sub-difference number clearing process is completed. That is, if the AT mode is won within the period set as the predetermined value in step S3107, the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued thereafter.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3112 (when the value of the continuation counter is 0), it is assumed that the period for continuing the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 has expired, and the count continuation flag is cleared in step S3115. After that, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, if the period set as the predetermined value in step S3107 has elapsed without winning the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared by the end of the period.

<Process for displaying the difference number>
The process for displaying the number of sub-differences in step S5003 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game number command and the difference number command are received as the command at the time of total stop. If these commands have not been received, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated as it is.

If the game number command and the difference number command have been received, the second sub difference number clearing process is executed in step S5302. The second sub-difference number clearing process is a process for controlling the clear timing of the value of the MY2 counter (sub-difference number MY2), in addition to the sub-difference number clearing process (FIG. 51) described above.

Here, the process for clearing the second sub-difference number in step S5302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. In the second sub-difference number clearing process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the pseudo ED end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183.

When the pseudo ED end flag is set, that is, when the pseudo ending effect is completed, the value of the MY2 counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is cleared in step S5402. In the following step S5403, the pseudo ED end flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and then the process for clearing the second sub-difference number is finished.

Returning to the description of the difference number display process (FIG. 77), after the execution of step S5302, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not the difference number display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The difference number display flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the difference number image 411 is being displayed.

If the difference number display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S5304, and it is determined whether or not the AT start command has been received as the current stop all command. The AT start command is a command for notifying the transition to AT mode. When the AT start command is received, the difference number display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S5305.

In step S5306, the value of the MY2 counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is referred to, and the current sub-difference number MY2 is grasped. In the following step S5307, the display setting process of the difference number image 411 is executed. As a result, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the difference number image 411, the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S5306 is displayed. Since the AT start command is transmitted at the end of the game immediately before shifting to the AT mode, the display of the difference number image 411 is started from the next game (the first game in the AT mode).

After the execution of step S5307, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5304 (when the AT start command is not received), that is, when the AT mode is not entered, the difference number image 411 is not displayed, and the processing after step S5305 is skipped and the difference is made. The process for displaying the number of sheets is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5303 (when the difference number display flag is set), that is, if the difference number image 411 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S5308, and the count end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Determine if it is set. If the count end flag is not set, in step S5309, the value of the MY2 counter in the various counter areas 183b is referred to, and the current sub-difference number MY2 is grasped.

In step S5310, the difference number image 411 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated based on the grasping result of step S5309. Specifically, the display mode of the difference number image 411 is changed so that the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 grasped in step S5309 is displayed. After the execution of step S5310, the process for displaying the difference number is terminated.

In addition, in the difference number display process (FIG. 64) according to the second embodiment, step S3803 (process for changing the mode of difference number display) was executed, and the start effect for each ending effect was performed. In the next game, the difference number image 411 is erased and the notification image 433 composed of the characters "celebration" is displayed, but in the present embodiment, such processing is not executed. That is, the difference number image 411 is continuously displayed during the execution of each ending effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5308 (when the count end flag is set), the process proceeds to step S5311, and the display of the difference number image 411 is set to end. As a result, the display of the difference number image 411 is erased from the auxiliary display unit 65. As described above, the count end flag is (1) the AT mode ends when the upper limit is reached, (2) the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode, and (3) the second CZ mode is entered. This is set when any of the conditions that the number of games set as a predetermined value is consumed without winning the AT mode is satisfied when the AT mode ends without doing so. Therefore, the display and update of the difference number image 411 is continuously performed in the period from the start of the display of the image 411 until any one of the above conditions is satisfied.

After the execution of step S5311, in steps S5312 and S5313, the difference number display flag and the count end flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared, and then the difference number display process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the process for clearing the second sub-difference number in step S5302 (FIG. 78), when the MY2 counter is cleared by step S5402, the count end flag setting process is not performed. That is, when the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared by the end of the pseudo-ending effect, the display of the difference number image 411 is continued based on the update result of the sub-difference number MY2 started from the initial value in the game after the pseudo-ending effect.

<Flow of ending production and production during AT mode>
The flow of the ending effect and the effect during the AT mode will be explained. First, refer to FIG. 79 for the case where the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 in a certain advantageous section and the count of the started sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number in the advantageous section. I will explain while.

When the AT mode is started at the timing t1, the AT effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT effect, the AT mode start effect (FIG. 54 (a)) is executed, and then the AT mode middle effect (FIG. 79 (f)) is executed. In the AT mode effect, the character image 401, the notification image 422 notifying that the AT mode is in progress such as "AT mode", and the difference number image 411 are displayed.

The difference number image 411 is independently updated by the sub control device 81 separately from the main difference number MY1 updated by the sub control device 81 in correspondence with the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101. The value of the difference number MY2 is reflected. However, the sub difference number MY2 at this point is 0 as in the main difference number MY1, and both have the same value.

After that, when the game in the AT mode is advanced, both the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) and the sub difference number MY2 increase with the small winning combination such as the push order bell (FIG. 79 (d), (E)). Then, at the timing t3, when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the ending start number without ending the advantageous section, the sub difference number MY2 also reaches the ending start number accordingly.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (g), the normal ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the normal ending effect, first, the start effect corresponding to the start of the normal ending effect is executed. In this start effect, the number of medals such as "Get 2250 or more" has exceeded 2250 as corresponding to the notification image 431 notifying that the ending effect is started and the difference number image 411. The notification image 432 to be notified is displayed.

After the start effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 79 (h), the ending effect for the normal ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. For example, at the timing t4 within a predetermined number of games (for example, 15 games) after the normal ending effect is started, a notification that the ending effect is in progress, a difference number image 411 corresponding to the increase / decrease in the number of medals, a story effect, etc. The continuous ending effect of is displayed.

In the second embodiment, the difference number image 411 (notification image 432) is erased, and the notification image 433 (FIG. 61) for notifying the arrival of the ending by characters is displayed, but in the present embodiment, the difference is displayed. The number image 411 is continuously displayed, and the number of medals won each time during the ending effect is notified.

When the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the upper limit increase number at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 79 (i), the ending end effect corresponding to the end of the normal ending effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Will be executed. In the ending effect, the difference number image 411 is displayed as a notification of the final number of medals won, and the notification image 434 is displayed to notify the end of the ending effect.

Further, at the timing t5, the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) reaches the upper limit increase number, and the initialization process (step S2110 in FIG. 45) is executed. As a result, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is cleared by the main control device 101, and the number becomes 0. In line with this, the sub-control device 81 also clears the main difference number MY1 and the sub-difference number MY2 (flow when affirmative determination is made in step S2909 in FIG. 50 and step S3103 in FIG. 51), and both are zero.

As described above, when the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 (initial value) and then reaches the ending start number without ending the advantageous section (when the upper limit increase is expected). Is usually executed as an ending effect.

Next, after the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 in a certain advantageous section, the advantageous section ends, and then before the number of games set as a predetermined value (for example, 50 games) is consumed. The case of shifting to the AT mode again will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. It should be noted that FIG. 81 corresponds to the continuation of FIG. 80, and the same reference numerals are given to those showing the same timing.

By the way, in the sub-difference number MY2, as described in the first embodiment, (1) the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reach the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number, and the advantageous section becomes. If it ends, (2) if the second CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode and the advantageous section ends, (3) the AT mode ends without shifting to the second CZ mode and the advantageous section ends. In that case, after that, without winning the AT mode, the game is cleared (initialized) in any of the cases where the number of games set as the predetermined value is exhausted, and the update is continued in other situations.

When the AT mode is started at the timing t1, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the AT effect and displays the difference number image 411 notifying the number of medals won. After that, when the game in the AT mode is advanced, both the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (main difference number MY1) and the sub difference number MY2 increase with the small winning combination such as the push order bell (FIG. 80 (d), (E)).

When the AT mode ends without shifting to the second CZ mode at the timing t2, the advantageous section (advantageous section A) ends (FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c)). As a result, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 is cleared. Along with this, the main difference number MY1 updated by the sub control device 81 is cleared (FIG. 80 (d)). On the other hand, the sub difference number MY2 updated by the sub control device 81 is not cleared, and the update is continued thereafter.

If the advantageous section transition lottery is won after the advantageous section A is completed, the next advantageous section B is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed with all the small wins as an opportunity, and the winning probability is also 100%. It is shown in the figure.

When the AT mode is won at the timing t3, which is the timing within the predetermined number of games (for example, within 50 games) from the timing t2 at which the AT mode in the previous advantageous section A ends, and the mode shifts to the AT mode, the main difference number MY1 is again. And the number of sub-differences MY2 increases (FIGS. 80 (d) and 80 (e)). At that time, the main difference number MY1 is cleared at the end of the advantageous section A, and the sub difference number MY2 is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section A, and the update is continued. It becomes. Specifically, in the sub-difference number MY2, the number of medals is larger than that of the main difference number MY1 by the amount of inheriting the medal increase in the previous advantageous section A.

When the AT mode of the advantageous section B is started, the effect during the AT mode is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT mode effect at that time, the character image 401, the notification image 422 that notifies that the AT mode is in the "AT mode", and the difference number image 411 are displayed. The difference number image 411 at this time is displayed based on the sub-difference number MY2, and shows a larger number of sheets than the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY of the advantageous section B.

After that, when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number at the timing t4, the pseudo ending effect is executed. Initially, as a pseudo ending effect, as shown in FIG. 80 (f), a start effect having the same contents as the normal ending effect is executed. Further, after the execution of the start effect, the ending effect corresponding to the pseudo ending effect is performed, and the content of the ending effect is the same as the ending effect for the normal ending effect. That is, the notification that the ending effect is in progress and the difference number image 411 corresponding to the increase / decrease number of medals are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this embodiment, the display of the second difference number image 437 (notification of the number of medals acquired based on the main difference number MY1) as in the second embodiment is not performed.

At timing t5, when the number of digested games in the pseudo ending effect reaches a specific number of games (for example, 25 games), as shown in FIG. 80 (g), the ending end effect corresponding to the end of the pseudo ending effect is an auxiliary display unit. It is executed at 65. In the ending effect, the difference number image 411 is displayed as a notification of the final number of medals won, and the notification image 434 is displayed to notify the end of the ending effect. That is, the pseudo ending effect has the same appearance as the normal ending effect from the start effect to the end effect, and it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

Further, at the timing t5, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared to 0 based on the end of the pseudo ending effect. At that time, since the MY for increasing / decreasing the number of advantageous sections has not reached the upper limit increase number (2440 sheets) and the other advantageous section end conditions are not satisfied, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is not cleared, and the value of the main difference number MY1 at that time is maintained as it is. Therefore, at this point, the main difference number MY1 is larger than the sub difference number MY2.

At the timing t6, when the next game in which the pseudo ending effect is completed is started, the continuous effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. 80 (h). In the continuous production, for example, a notification image 471 that notifies that the AT mode such as "It will continue !!" does not end and continues further is displayed.

By executing the continuation effect in the next game in which the pseudo ending effect is completed as described above, it is possible to notify the continuation of the AT mode after making it appear as if the AT mode has ended. It becomes possible to arouse joy and surprise.

Here, it seems that the player was not limited to the effect of notifying the player of the continuation of the AT mode by the continuous effect, and the player had won (pulled back) the AT mode during or before the pseudo ending effect. It is thought that the effect of making it can be expected. Therefore, as the notification image 471 in the continuous effect, a display suggesting (notifying) that the AT mode has been won may be performed instead of or in addition to the display suggesting that the AT mode continues. When both the indication of continuation and the indication of winning are performed, the latter may be performed and then the former may be performed, or they may be performed at the same time.

From the next game in which the continuation effect is executed, the effect during AT mode is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the AT mode effect at this time, as in the AT mode effect before the pseudo ending effect is performed, the character image 401 and the notification image 422 that notifies that the AT mode such as "AT mode" is in effect. , The difference number image 411 and is displayed.

However, since the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared with the end of the pseudo-ending effect, the difference number image 411 displays the number of medals acquired after the pseudo-ending effect is completed. For example, at the timing t7 when the number of medals acquired after the pseudo ending effect ends is 10, "10 get" is displayed as the difference number image 411. As a result, it is suppressed that the difference number image 411 displays the number of sheets larger than the upper limit increase number and gives an unnatural impression to the player, and by extension, the game that the advantageous section is not actually completed. It is possible to prevent people from being easily enlightened. That is, it is possible to enhance the effect of concealing that the pseudo ending effect is a pseudo one.

As described above, when the count of the sub-difference number MY2 starts from 0 (initial value) and then reaches the ending start number across multiple advantageous sections (when the upper limit increase number is expected to be reached). Is not a normal ending effect but a pseudo ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

After the pseudo ending effect was performed, when the main difference number MY1 reached the ending start number at the timing t8, the special ending effect was executed in the second embodiment, but in the present embodiment, such The ending effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 81 (h), the effect during the AT mode is continued as it is.

Then, when the main difference number MY1 reaches the increased number at the timing t9, the AT end effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. 81 (i). In the AT end effect, the difference number image 411 is displayed together with the notification image 424 notifying the end of the AT mode such as "AT mode end". In the difference number image 411, the number of sheets corresponding to the sub difference number MY2 at that time is displayed as the final acquisition number. In the next game in which the AT end effect is completed, the difference number image 411 is deleted.

Further, at the timing t9, the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated by the main control device 101 reaches the upper limit increase number, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is cleared. Correspondingly, the main difference number MY1 is cleared also in the sub control device 81. Further, in the sub control device 81, the sub difference number MY2 is cleared to 0. The number of sheets displayed by the difference number image 411 in the AT end effect corresponds to the sub difference number MY2 before being cleared.

By the way, if the advantageous section ends after the execution of the pseudo ending effect and before the main difference number MY1 reaches the upper limit increase number, the final acquisition number is notified by the second CZ mode end effect or the difference number image 411 in the normal effect. Will be done. Specifically, when the second CZ mode is entered after the end of the AT mode and the advantageous section ends due to the end of the second CZ mode without winning the AT mode, the difference number image in the second CZ mode end effect. The final number of acquired cards is notified by 411. If the advantageous section ends without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, the difference number image 411 is displayed during the period from the end of the AT mode to 50 games (the period during which the continuation counter is updated). Is continued, the final acquired number is notified by the difference number image 411 in the final game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Corresponding to the end of the pseudo ending effect, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared in the middle of the advantageous section B. In this case, in the display period of the difference number image 411 including the clear timing (initialization timing) of the sub difference number MY2, the player recognizes that the number of medals won returns to the initial value, and the advantageous section ends. Can make you think more strongly. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of inviting the joy and surprise of the player by continuing the advantageous section after making the advantageous section seem to have ended by the pseudo ending effect.

The configuration is such that the clearing process of the sub-difference number MY2 performed in the middle of the advantageous section B is performed during the AT mode. In this case, the AT mode can be continued after pretending that the AT mode ends by the clearing process of the sub-difference number MY2, and the joy and surprise of the player can be suitably aroused.

After clearing the sub-difference number MY2 corresponding to the end of the pseudo ending effect, the continuation suggestion effect suggesting the continuation of the AT mode is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode is pulled back during the execution of the pseudo ending effect, and it is possible to more appropriately arouse the joy and surprise of the player.

In that case, since each ending effect is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the normal ending effect and the pseudo ending effect, the player finds out that it is a pseudo one at the time of executing the pseudo ending effect. This makes it difficult, and in turn, makes it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the AT mode will continue before the continuation suggestion effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the surprise of the player when the continuous suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The ending effect is not executed when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number after the execution of the pseudo ending effect. When the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared in the middle of the advantageous section, the period (number of games) until the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the upper limit increase number is advantageous in that the update is started in response to the transition to the advantageous section. It is inevitably shorter than the period until the section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number. If the ending effect is performed again after such a short period of time after the pseudo ending effect is performed, there is a concern that the player may have an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this configuration, since the execution of the ending effect when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number after the pseudo ending effect is restricted, it is suppressed that a plurality of ending effects are performed in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent an unnatural impression.

In that case, since the AT mode end effect is configured, it is possible to think that the end of the advantageous section corresponding to the end of the AT mode is not the end of the advantageous section due to the arrival of the upper limit. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the end of the advantageous section while suppressing the impression of being unnatural.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit of the number of games, it is possible to switch between performing the ending effect in the advantageous section and performing the ending effect by carrying over to the later advantageous section. ing. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of ceiling games (ceiling counter) in the AT mode is set in step S1907 of the first section display process (FIG. 44), but in the present embodiment, such a ceiling game is set. The number is not set.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the ending effect setting process of FIG. 59. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 59, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 (when a game number command and a difference number command are received), it is determined in step S360 whether any ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. judge. If none of the ED flags are set, the process proceeds to step S3603, and the value of the AG counter in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is referred to to grasp the advantageous section game number AG. In step S3604, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG grasped in step S3603 is equal to or greater than the number of ending games.

When the number of advantageous section games AG is equal to or greater than the number of ending games, that is, when the ending effect should be started, the process proceeds to step S3605, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In step S3606, based on the number of remaining games grasped in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games can be reached while staying in the AT mode.

If the maximum number of games can be reached, the ED execution determination process is performed in step S6001, and then the ending effect setting process is terminated. The ED execution determination process determines whether or not to execute the ending effect. Here, the ED execution determination process in step S6001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the ED execution determination process, first, in step S6101, the main difference number MY1 is grasped by referring to the MY1 counter in the various counter areas 183b. The main difference number MY1 corresponds to the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY updated on the main control device 101 side, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is the number of medals difference each time in the advantageous section (the number of medals inserted from the total number of payout medals). It is the one obtained by subtracting the total number of. When updating the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, as described above, the negative value is truncated and the update is performed. Therefore, at the start timing of the first AT mode in the advantageous section, the number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section is basically 0, and then the number increases as the game in the AT mode is performed. Become. That is, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY can be regarded as the number of medals increased by the player in the AT mode, in other words, the number of medals difference in the AT mode. Therefore, it can be said that the process of step S6101 grasps the number of medals difference in the advantageous section, and can also be said to grasp the number of medals difference in the AT mode.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the main difference number MY1 grasped in step S6101 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number. The predetermined number of medals is a standard for judging whether or not the player has obtained enough medals to obtain a certain degree of satisfaction in comparison with the maximum medal value (2400) that can be obtained in one advantageous section. The value. This reference value (predetermined number of sheets) can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, it is set to 2000 sheets as an example.

If the main difference number MY1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S6103, the normal ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the ED determination process ends. The normal ED flag is for the CPU 181 to understand that the normal ending effect should be executed.

If the main difference number MY1 is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S6104, and the carry-over flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The carry-over flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number in a state where the main difference number MY1 is less than the predetermined number, and the advantageous section ends based on the arrival. It is a thing.

After the execution of step S6104, the ED determination process is terminated. That is, when the main difference number MY1 is less than a predetermined value, the ED determination process (ending effect setting process) is usually terminated without setting the ED flag. In this case, even if the number of advantageous section games AG becomes the number of ending games, the ending effect is not started, and the effect during the AT mode is continued as it is. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section ends, the AT end effect is executed with the end of the AT mode.

<Process for clearing the number of sub-differences>
The sub-difference number clearing process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed in step S2910 of the difference number management process (FIG. 50), and is executed in place of the sub-difference number clear process of FIG. 51. In FIG. 84, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If the count continuation flag is not set, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the AT end command is received as the current command at the time of total stop. The AT end command is a command for notifying that the AT mode has ended.

When the AT end command is received, that is, when the AT mode is terminated, the process proceeds to step S3103, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets), or the advantageous section game number AG is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the AT mode is terminated when the number of games is reached.

If the AT mode has ended due to the arrival of the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S6201 to determine whether or not the arrival of the upper limit has reached the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section AG. When the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit of the number of games, it is determined in step S6202 whether or not the carry-over flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a.

When the carry-over flag is set, that is, when the main difference number MY1 is less than the predetermined number (for example, 2000) and the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit game number, in step S6203, A second predetermined value is set in the continuation counter provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The continuation counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the period (number of games) for continuing the count of the sub-difference number MY2, and in the situation where the value of the continuation counter is 1 or more, it is the case where the advantageous section ends. Also continues counting the sub-difference number MY2. The initial value (second predetermined value to be set) of the continuation counter is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, 50 is set corresponding to the number of continuous games (50 games) in the second CZ mode. ..

In step S6204, the count continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The count continuation flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count of the sub-difference number MY2 should be continued.

When the count continuation flag is set as described above, the affirmative determination is made in step S3101 at the next processing round in the sub-difference number clearing processing. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3111, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is updated as one decrement.

As shown in FIG. 51, after the execution of step S3111, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the value of the continuation counter is 0. If the value of the continuation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3113, and it is determined whether or not the AT winning command is received as the start command in this game.

When the AT winning command is received, in step S3114, the count continuation flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and the value of the continuation counter in the various counter areas 183b is cleared. After that, the sub-difference number clearing process is completed. That is, if the AT mode is won within the period set as the second predetermined value in step S6203, the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued thereafter.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3112 (when the value of the continuation counter is 0), it is assumed that the period for continuing the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 has expired, and the count continuation flag is cleared in step S3115. After that, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, if the period set as the second predetermined value in step S6203 has elapsed without winning the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared by the end of the period.

Returning to FIG. 84, after the execution of step S6204, the second CZ mode effect is set in step S6205. Specifically, the second CZ mode effect is set to be executed during the period in which the count continuation flag is set.

As the second CZ mode effect, a second CZ mode start effect and a second CZ mode middle effect are set. Each of these effects is the same as the effect described with reference to FIG. 55. In the second CZ mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), for example, a notification image 402 notifying the start of the second CZ mode such as "pull-back chance start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the predetermined character image 401. indicate. Further, in the second CZ mode production, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for example, together with the character image 401, an auxiliary display unit displays a notification image 403 for notifying that the user is in the second CZ mode such as "pull-back chance". Display at 65. In each of these effects, the difference number image 411 based on the sub difference number MY2 is displayed as a notification of the number of medals acquired (the number of medals to be paid out minus the number of inserted medals).

Here, in the scene where the process of step S6205 is executed, the player stays in the normal mode in which the winning probability of the state related to the lottery in the AT mode is set to be relatively low. That is, the effect for the second CZ mode set by step S6205 is a pseudo one to make the player think that the second CZ mode has been shifted to the situation where the second CZ mode has not actually been shifted. Is. With such a configuration, the count of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued due to the carry-over flag being set, and the shift to the second CZ mode is caused after the end of the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult to distinguish from the case where the count of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued.

In the present embodiment, as the mode in which the count continuation flag is cleared, the value of the continuation counter becomes 0 without winning the AT mode, and the value of the continuation counter becomes 0 before the value becomes 0. There is something that is triggered by winning the AT mode. In the former case, the second CZ mode end effect is set to be executed in the game in which the value of the continuation counter becomes 0. In the second CZ mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), for example, the difference number image 411 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the notification image 404 that notifies the end of the second CZ mode such as "end of pullback chance". .. In the latter case, after notifying the winner of the AT mode, it is set to end the second CZ mode effect without executing the second CZ mode end effect.

In step S6206, the carry-over flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and then the sub-difference number clearing process is terminated.

When a negative judgment is made in step S6201 (when the AT mode is terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY), or when a negative judgment is made in step S6202 (when the carry-over flag is not set), the carry-over flag is not set. The process proceeds to step S3104, and the values of the MY2 counters in the various counter areas 183b are cleared. That is, in the situation where the negative determination is made in each of the above steps, since various ending effects are being executed, the counting of the sub-difference number MY2 is terminated in accordance with the end of the ending effects.

Here, a flow will be described when a negative determination is made in step S6102 of the ED execution determination process of FIG. 83 and the advantageous section ends without executing the normal ending effect. After the advantageous section is completed in such an embodiment, in the next and subsequent processing times in the ending effect setting process of FIG. 82, the determination process of step S3604 (whether or not the advantageous section game number AG is equal to or more than the ending start game number) and the step. After the determination process of S3609 (whether or not the main difference number MY1 is equal to or more than the ending start number) is negatively determined, the determination process of step S3613 (whether or not the sub difference number MY2 is equal to or greater than the ending start number) is executed. ..

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3613 that the sub-difference number MY2 is equal to or greater than the ending start number, in step S3614, the number of remaining games in the AT mode being executed is grasped. In the following step S3615, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games grasped in step S3614 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games. The predetermined number of games corresponds to the number of continuous games of the pseudo ending effect, for example, 25 games. When the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the pseudo ED flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3616. The pseudo ED flag is for the CPU 181 to understand that the pseudo ending effect should be executed, and the pseudo ending effect is executed when the flag is set.

In this way, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation where the main difference number MY1 has not reached the predetermined number, the pseudo ending effect is based on the fact that the sub difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number. Is executed. In this case, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section and the value is held as described in the sub-difference number clearing process (FIG. 67). Further, the update result of the sub-difference number MY2 held in this way reaches the ending start number in the advantageous section that shifts after the advantageous section ended by reaching the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section game number AG. This is the case when the mode is changed and the sub-difference number MY2 increases. That is, the pseudo ending effect is executed when the sub-difference number MY2 increases in the later advantageous section and reaches the ending start number.

<About the flow at the end of the advantageous section>
The flow when the advantageous section ends due to the fact that the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. Note that FIG. 86 corresponds to the continuation of FIG. 85, and the same reference numerals are given to those showing the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), it is assumed that the AT mode is entered at the timing t1 which is the intermediate timing of a certain advantageous section A. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), it is assumed that the advantageous section game number AG reaches the ending start game number (for example, 1475 games) at the timing t2 which is the intermediate timing of the duration TA of the AT mode.

In the present embodiment, as a mode in which the AT mode is grasped to be continued, the AT mode is continued due to the number of remaining games in the AT mode being 1 or more, and the AT mode is continued after the end of the AT mode. There is one that shifts to the second CZ mode, pulls back the AT mode during the second CZ mode, and returns to the AT mode. The duration TA includes both of these aspects, in other words, the period during the second CZ mode.

When the advantageous section game number AG reaches the ending start game number at the timing t2, the sub control device 81 determines whether or not the main difference number MY1 is a predetermined number (for example, 2000) or more. Since the main difference number MY1 here is the number of medals acquired by the player in the period TB from the start of the AT mode at the timing t1 to the time when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of ending start games at the timing t2. The determination at the timing t2 is to determine whether or not the number of medals that the player has been able to acquire by the AT mode executed in the advantageous section A is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

As a result of the determination, when the main difference number MY1 is a predetermined number or more, as shown in FIG. 85C, the ending start effect for the normal ending effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing t2. .. That is, in a situation where the main difference number MY1 is a predetermined number or more, the normal ending effect is executed as usual. After that, when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number and the advantageous section A ends at the timing t3, the normal ending effect is ended, and the main difference number MY1 and the sub difference number MY2 are cleared to the initial value. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the main difference number MY1 has not reached the predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the normal ending effect is not executed at the timing t2, and the effect during the AT mode is continued as it is. .. After that, when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number at the timing t3 and the advantageous section A ends, the AT end effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). The AT end effect at this time is the same as the AT end effect executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0. That is, at the timing t3, from the player's point of view, it is possible to identify whether the AT mode has ended when the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games, or whether the AT mode has ended with the number of remaining games being 0. The end of AT mode is notified so that it becomes impossible or difficult.

Further, at the timing t3, while the main difference number MY1 is cleared with the end of the advantageous section A, the sub difference number MY2 is not cleared, and the value of the sub difference number MY2 at that time is inherited thereafter. At the same time, a second predetermined value (for example, 50 games) is set as the update continuation period of the sub-difference number MY2.

When the advantageous section transition lottery is won after the advantageous section A is completed, the next advantageous section B is started as shown in FIG. 86. In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed with all the small wins as an opportunity, and the winning probability is also 100%. It is shown in the figure.

After the AT end effect is executed at the timing t3, the second CZ mode effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. 86 (g). For example, assuming that the second CZ mode effect shifts to the advantageous section B in the second game after the advantageous section A ends, the second CZ mode effect is executed in both the normal section before shifting to the advantageous section B and the advantageous section B. Will be done. At this time, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not executed in the normal section, and the player stays in the normal mode in the advantageous section B. That is, the second CZ mode effect is a pseudo one performed without actually shifting to the second CZ mode. In this way, by executing the second CZ mode effect after the end of the advantageous section A, the player makes it appear that the advantageous section A continues, in other words, the advantageous section A has ended. Can be obscured.

In the second CZ mode effect, the difference number image 411 is displayed as an indication of the number of medals won. The difference number image 411 is displayed based on the sub difference number MY2 that inherits the value updated in the AT mode in the advantageous section A. In this way, by displaying the number of sheets reflecting the number of sheets acquired in the previous AT mode as the difference number image 411, it is possible to more preferably think that the advantageous section A is continuing.

The net increase is a negative value (minus about 0.64) between the normal section that shifts after the end of the advantageous section A and the period before shifting to the AT mode in the advantageous section B that shifts after the normal section. Therefore, the value of the sub-difference number MY2 decreases. Therefore, for example, if the difference number image 411 displayed at the end of the advantageous section A is 1950 (FIG. 85 (e)), it is displayed at the timing t4 after several games have been exhausted from the end of the advantageous section A. The difference number of images 411 is 1920 (FIG. 86 (g)), which is less than that. As described above, the tendency that a smaller number of images is displayed as the difference number image 411 than at the end of the AT mode is the same even when the second CZ mode is entered after the end of the AT mode.

After that, when the AT mode is entered at the timing t5, which is the timing before the number of digested games reaches the second predetermined value after the advantageous section A ends, the sub-difference number MY2, which has been continued until then, is further updated. It is decided to continue. Then, as the number of medals increases in the AT mode, when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number (for example, 2250) at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. Is executed. This makes it possible to make the player think that the maximum number of medals that can be obtained in one advantageous section has been obtained.

The pseudo ending effect ends when the number of digested games after the effect is started reaches a specific number of games (for example, 25 games). However, since the ending effect is pseudo, the AT mode continues after that. Corresponding to this, after the pseudo ending effect is completed, the effect during AT mode is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the switching process is performed so as to display the difference number image 411 based on the main difference number MY1, and the main difference number MY1 reaches the ending start number. The ending effect may be executed, or the AT end effect is executed based on the fact that the sub difference number MY2 is cleared and the main difference number MY1 reaches the upper limit increase number as in the third embodiment. May be good.

If the number of digested games reaches the second predetermined value without winning the AT mode after the end of the advantageous section A, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes the second CZ mode end effect. Further, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared and used as the initial value.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the advantageous section A ends when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect can be executed in the advantageous section B after that. According to this configuration, when the number of medals acquired to the extent that the player can feel the sense of accomplishment and satisfaction is not obtained and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games AG, the ending is performed. The execution of the production can be carried over to the later advantageous section B. As a result, the ending effect can be executed with the number of medals acquired increased, and the player can easily obtain a sense of accomplishment or the like.

At that time, at the end of the previous advantageous section A, the AT mode end effect is executed instead of the ending effect. The end can be obscured.

When the ending effect is executed in the later advantageous section B, the ending effect (pseudo ending effect) is executed based on the fact that the sub-difference number MY2 inherited without being initialized reaches the ending start number. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the ending effect has been executed when the number of medals acquired has reached the upper limit increase number, and it is possible to make the configuration more easily perceived as a sense of accomplishment. Further, according to this configuration, the ending effect carried over to the later advantageous section B can be executed in accordance with the execution timing of the ending effect predicted by the player from the difference number image 411, and the actual advantageous section can be executed. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the ending effect is performed at a special timing deviated from the end timing.

If the AT mode is won within a predetermined number of games (second predetermined value) after the end of the previous advantageous section A, the pseudo ending effect can be executed in the later advantageous section B.

For example, if the sub-difference number MY2 is inherited even when the interval between the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section A and the AT mode in the later advantageous section B is widened, the relationship between the two AT modes is weakened. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to feel that the upper limit increase number has been reached within the advantageous section of 1. Further, since the update result of the sub-difference number MY2 changes in the decreasing direction from the end of the previous advantageous section A to the transition to the AT mode in the later advantageous section B, such a decrease state is maintained for a long period of time. When the player is notified through the difference number image 411, the decrease in the number of medals held is emphasized, and there is a concern that the player may have an unpleasant impression. In this respect, in this configuration, the ending effect is carried over to the case where the AT mode is won within a predetermined number of games after the end of the previous advantageous section A, that is, the case where the AT mode is re-winned relatively quickly. Since this is done, it is possible to make the player feel that a larger number of medals have been obtained while suppressing the inconvenience that the decrease in the number of medals held is emphasized.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a lottery for shifting to the second CZ mode is performed at the end of the AT mode, and when the lottery is won, the lottery for shifting to the second CZ mode is performed. It may be configured to always shift to the second CZ mode. Further, the transition lottery is not necessarily performed at the end of the AT mode, and is not necessarily performed at the start of the AT mode or in the middle of the AT mode. In that case, it may be accompanied by conditions such as when a predetermined winning combination is won, or it may not impose such conditions such as performing the above-mentioned transition lottery with a predetermined number of games.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the mode can be shifted to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, but the second CZ mode may not be provided and the mode may be shifted to the normal mode when the AT mode is finished. In this case, the advantageous section may end with the end of the AT mode, or the advantageous section may continue even after the end of the AT mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section ends when the second CZ mode transitioned after the end of the AT mode ends, but the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, and the next advantageous section ends. It may be configured so that it can shift to a predetermined CZ mode (a mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode is higher than that of the normal mode) at the start of. In this case, even if the advantageous section ends due to the end of the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 (MY2 counter) may not be cleared, and the value at that time may be inherited to the next advantageous section. At that time, the predetermined CZ mode is performed over a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games), and if the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared and the CZ is cleared. If the AT mode is won during the mode, the sub-difference number MY2 may be taken over without being cleared.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific state advantageous to the player, an AT mode of a game number type that ends when the number of remaining games becomes 0 is exemplified, but the mode is continued at the start of the AT mode. The AT mode of the difference number type (specification to continue the AT mode within the range of the remaining difference number) may be set, in which a possible difference number (holding difference number) is set and the remaining number becomes 0. Further, the specific state is not limited to the AT mode, and may be, for example, an additional special zone where the number of remaining games in the CZ mode or the AT mode is easily added, an ART mode, a bonus game, or the like.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the AT mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the AT mode via the precursor mode, but the AT mode may be shifted to the AT mode without going through the precursor mode. The game may be configured to shift to the AT mode from the game that has won the AT mode or the next game.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the number of medals won (sub-difference number MY2) is notified by displaying the difference number image 411 on the auxiliary display unit 65, but the difference number image 411 is notified by using a light emitting means such as an LED. Alternatively, the notification may be made using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the movable effect. Further, it does not necessarily have to be a visual notification, and may be an auditory notification by voice.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the difference number image 411 is configured so as to notify the medal difference number by a number, but the medal difference number may be notified by displaying a pattern or the like other than the number. For example, it may be displayed by a level meter or the like, or a predetermined icon may be displayed for each unit number such as 10 sheets or 100 sheets.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode shifts to the later advantageous section B by handing over the medal difference number (sub difference number MY2) to the later advantageous section and displaying the result as the difference number image 411. Is configured to remind the player that it is related to the AT mode performed in the previous advantageous section A, but instead of or in addition to the number of medals difference, the number of digested games in the AT mode (total number of games) May be used. In this case, the number of digested games in the AT mode is grasped and updated, notification corresponding to the result (display of the total number of games, etc.) is performed, and the result is inherited even when the advantageous section ends. In this case, in the AT mode in the later advantageous section, the continuation of the number of digestion games notified in the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section is notified, so that the AT mode that shifts in the later advantageous section B is the first. It is possible to make the player think that it is related to the AT mode performed in the advantageous section A.

Further, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals inserted is not subtracted) may be used, or in the case of a configuration in which the AT mode is continuously set, the number of continuous sets may be used. Further, as a notification reminiscent of the above-mentioned relationship, a notification not based on the updated information may be used. As such a notification, it is conceivable that the notification reminds us of the AT mode consecutive villa, for example, the notification such as "AT mode consecutive villa" is performed according to the AT mode in the advantageous section B later. The above notification may be performed during the AT mode in the later advantageous section, or may be performed in the AT mode winning game before shifting to the AT mode.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the sub-difference number MY2 is updated in the period from the end of the AT mode in the previous advantageous section A to the transition to the AT mode in the later advantageous section B. The sub-difference number MY2 may not be updated. That is, in the AT mode in the later advantageous section B, the continuation of the difference number when the AT mode in the earlier advantageous section A ends may be notified. In this case, the difference number image 411 may not be displayed during the period when the sub difference number MY2 is not updated.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the sub-difference number MY2 is not updated in the normal section, but the sub-control device 81 grasps the medal difference number in the normal section and updates the sub-difference number MY2. May be. With such a configuration, the number of displayed images of the difference number image 411 can be changed during the normal section, and the interruption of the advantageous section can be made more difficult to understand. The number of medals difference in the sub control device 81 is grasped by grasping the number of bets and the number of payouts by a bet command, a payout command, etc. transmitted from the main control device 101, and deriving the difference number from the result. It is good.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the difference number image 411 is displayed in the normal section, but the difference number image 411 may not be displayed in the normal section.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, if the AT mode is won within a predetermined number of games after the advantageous section ends due to the end of the AT mode, the sub-difference number MY2 is further inherited. When the AT mode is entered within a predetermined number of games, the sub-difference number MY2 may be further inherited.

Further, a plurality of types of AT modes may be provided, and it may be switched whether or not to take over the sub-difference number MY2 based on the type of the AT mode executed in the previous advantageous section. For example, the first AT mode is provided with a second AT mode that is advantageous to the player, such as the number of games being added more easily than the first AT mode and the set being easier to continue. While the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared by the end of the AT mode or the advantageous section, when the second AT mode ends, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared even if the AT mode or the advantageous section ends, and the later advantageous section The configuration will be taken over by. When the sub-difference number MY2 is inherited, the final number to be notified tends to increase. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the advantage of the second mode can be suitably appealed.

Further, it may be switched whether or not to take over the sub-difference number MY2 based on the actual results of the AT mode performed in the previous advantageous section. For example, if the number of medals acquired (difference number) in the AT mode in the previous advantageous section is less than the predetermined number, the sub-difference number MY2 is easily inherited or inherited, and if the number of medals acquired is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the sub-difference number MY2 is not inherited. Alternatively, it can be configured to be more difficult to take over than when the number is less than a predetermined number. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the final acquisition number notified in the AT mode from remaining in a small number.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared when the predetermined number of games is exhausted without winning the AT mode in the later advantageous section B after the end of the earlier advantageous section A. However, in addition to this, it may be cleared when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on or off. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the achievement of the player who played the previous day from being handed over to another player who plays the next day. Instead of or in addition to this, the sub-difference number MY2 may be cleared when the game is not executed for a predetermined period. In this case, after stopping the game, it is possible to prevent another player from taking over the achievement.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the difference number image 411 is displayed based on the sub difference number MY2 in the AT mode in the advantageous section A, but the difference number image 411 is displayed based on the main difference number MY1. May be good. That is, in a situation where the values of the sub difference number MY2 and the main difference number MY1 match, either the sub difference number MY2 or the main difference number MY1 may be used as the information for displaying the difference number image 411.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the predetermined number of games after the end of the AT mode (the update continuation period of the sub-difference number MY2 after the end of the advantageous section) is set to only one type of 50 games, but the number of multiple types of games is set. The number of games may be selected by one by preparing and drawing lots. In this case, the result of the completed AT mode may be reflected in the selection of the number of games. For example, when the number of medals won (difference number) in the AT mode is less than the predetermined number, it is easy to select a larger number of games than in the case of the predetermined number or more, so that the AT mode is restored within the predetermined number of games. It is possible to increase the chances of winning.

Further, instead of or in addition to the above, the number of games may be added while the predetermined number of games is being consumed. In this case, the additional lottery may be performed during the digestion period of a predetermined number of games. At this time, in the game in which the specific combination (rare role) that is easy to win in the AT mode is won, if the AT mode is not won, it is preferable that the game is easier to win in the above addition than the game in which the specific combination is not won. Further, an additional lottery may be performed during the AT mode, and if a winner is won, an additional lottery may be performed in a predetermined number of games after the AT mode.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section ends without the condition of reaching the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section game number AG or reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (for example, AT). After the end of the mode, when the advantageous section ends by not shifting to the second CZ mode), the end effect (advantageous section fall effect) that allows the player to recognize that the advantageous section has ended is an auxiliary display unit. It may be configured so that it can be executed at 65 or the like. In this case, when such a predetermined effect is performed, it is preferable to clear the sub-difference number MY2 so that the sub-difference number MY2 is not taken over to the next advantageous section.

Further, instead of clearing the sub-difference number MY2 when the end effect is performed, the end effect may be performed when the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared. For example, whether or not to retain the sub-difference number MY2 when the advantageous section ends due to the end of the AT mode without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode (predetermined game for continuing to update the sub-difference number MY2). (Whether or not to give a number) is distributed, and when it is determined that the sub-difference number MY2 is not held in the distribution, the end effect may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

(17) In the first embodiment described above, when the advantageous section ends due to the end of the AT mode and the update of the sub-difference number MY2 is continued in the predetermined number of games, the effect for the normal mode is executed. The effect for the second CZ mode may be executed as in the embodiment of. This also applies to the second and third embodiments.

Further, although the difference number image 411 is displayed when the effect for the normal mode is executed, the configuration is not such that this is not displayed. In this case, the update of the sub-difference number MY2 may be continued during the period in which the difference number image 411 is not displayed, or may be configured not to be continued (update is temporarily stopped). In the latter configuration, the continuation of the number of displayed sheets when the AT mode in the previous advantageous section ends is displayed in the AT mode in the later advantageous section.

(18) In the first embodiment, when the advantage section A ends in the advantage section A without shifting to the second CZ mode after the end of the AT mode, the upper limit increase number is reached. The configuration may be such that the remaining number of sheets is grasped, and when the grasped remaining number of sheets is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 400 sheets), the sub difference number MY2 is cleared and the remaining number of sheets is not handed over to the later advantageous section B. For example, when the main difference number MY1 or the sub difference number MY2 (both have the same value) when the advantageous section A ends due to the end of the AT mode is 1000, and the remaining number up to the upper limit increase is 1400. When the sub difference number MY2 is held without being cleared, while the main difference number MY1 etc. when the advantageous section A ends due to the end of the AT mode is 2100, and the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number is 300. Is configured to clear the sub-difference number MY2.

When the remaining number of medals is small when the advantageous section A ends due to the end of the AT mode, the number of medals acquired by the AT mode shifted in the later advantageous section B tends to exceed the remaining number of medals, and the difference number image 411 is used. There is a high possibility that the number of sheets exceeding the upper limit increase will be notified. In this case, when the difference number image 411 notifies the number of sheets exceeding the upper limit increase number, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of medals is different from the actual medal difference number, or the upper limit increase number is increased. Inconveniences such as the need for separate adjustments to prevent over-notification occur. In this respect, the above-mentioned configuration can suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

In addition, not limited to the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit increase number, when the number of acquired sheets at that time (main difference number MY1 or sub difference number MY2) is grasped and the grasped acquired number exceeds a specific number (for example, 2000). In addition, it may be configured to clear the sub-difference number MY2.

In addition, since it is assumed that the player is counting the number of games in the advantageous section, when the advantageous section A ends due to the end of the AT mode, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is grasped and the number of games remaining is grasped. When the number of remaining games grasped is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games (for example, 300 games), the sub-difference number MY2 may be cleared. Also in this case, the number AG of advantageous section games at that time may be grasped, and when the grasped number of games exceeds the specific number of games (1200 games), the sub-difference number MY2 may be cleared.

(19) In the second to fourth embodiments, as a specific effect, the ending when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number or the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number. Although the effect is illustrated, an end effect (advantageous section fall effect) in which the operator can recognize the end of the advantageous section may be used as a specific effect. Specifically, when the advantageous section ends due to a reason other than each of the above end conditions, the end effect can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and the advantageous section does not end and the AT mode continues. It is configured to execute the pseudo ending effect in the situation where the above is performed. Even with such a configuration, the advantageous section (AT mode) can be continued after making the player think that the advantageous section has ended.

(20) In the second to fourth embodiments, the pseudo ending effect is executed based on the fact that the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number in the later advantageous section B, but the sub-difference number MY2 is the ending. A pseudo ending effect may be executed triggered by an event other than reaching the starting number of sheets. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode executed in the later advantageous section B is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (a situation in which the number of remaining games is secured to some extent), and the player wins by a predetermined lottery, it is simulated. The ending effect may be executed.

(21) In the second to fourth embodiments, the ending effect is executed over a plurality of games, but the ending effect of only one game may be executed. In this case, the ending effect may be executed in the final game of the advantageous section. That is, the ending effect may be executed when the upper limit increase number or the upper limit game number is reached.

(22) In the second to fourth embodiments, the ending effect for the ending effect is executed after the final game of the advantageous section is completed (when the advantageous section is completed). The end effect may be executed. That is, the end effect may be performed when the advantageous section ends.

(23) In the second to fourth embodiments described above, the pseudo ending effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is equal to or greater than the number of executed games of the pseudo ending effect (for example, 25 games). Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the pseudo ending effect by taking into consideration the number of remaining games after the pseudo ending effect. Specifically, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is grasped at the start timing of the pseudo ending effect, and the grasped number of remaining games is added to the number of predetermined specific games with respect to the number of executed games of the pseudo ending effect. When the value is equal to or greater than the added value, the pseudo ending effect is executed, and when the value is less than the added value, the pseudo ending effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the AT mode from ending early after the pseudo ending effect.

Although the number of the specific games is not particularly limited, it is preferable that the number of games is equal to or larger than the initial number of games in the AT mode (for example, 25 games). Further, in the case of the difference number type AT mode, when the remaining difference number in the AT mode is equal to or greater than the difference number corresponding to the added value between the number of games required to execute the pseudo ending effect and the specific number of games. The configuration may be such that a pseudo ending effect is executed.

(24) In the second to fourth embodiments described above, the number of AT mode games may be added during the execution of each ending effect, but in the normal ending effect and the special ending effect, the addition corresponding to the winning may be won. The configuration may be such that the notification is restricted so as not to be performed, and the additional notification is not performed even in the pseudo ending effect. With such a configuration, the pseudo-ending effect can be made to look more realistic, and it is possible to make the player think when the advantageous section ends. It should be noted that the additional notification corresponding to the additional amount won during the execution of the pseudo ending effect may be performed in the AT mode after the end of the pseudo ending effect.

Further, while the normal ending effect and the special ending effect are restricted so that the additional notification is not performed, the pseudo ending effect may be configured to allow the execution of the additional notification. When the additional notification is performed, the player can grasp that it is a pseudo ending effect, in other words, the AT mode continues, so that the additional notification can function as a continuation suggestion of the AT mode. become. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the execution of the additional notification is permitted in both the normal ending effect and the special ending effect and the pseudo ending effect, and the pseudo ending effect may be configured so that the additional notification is more easily executed.

(25) In the second to fourth embodiments, the normal ending effect is executed based on the sub difference number MY2, but the normal ending effect may be executed based on the main difference number MY1.

(26) In the second embodiment described above, in the pseudo ending effect, the difference number image 411 that notifies the number of medals won by numbers is deleted, and the notification image 433 that congratulates the arrival of the ending is displayed, but the notification image 433 is displayed. The display of the difference number image 411 may be continued without displaying or in combination with the display of the notification image 433. In this case, one small winning combination for the upper limit increase number or a predetermined number of sheets corresponding thereto (for example, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting 3 pieces of the number of medals inserted from 2399 pieces which is the value immediately before the upper limit increase number). In order to prevent the difference number image 411 from notifying the number of sheets exceeding (2409, which is the sum of the maximum payout number of 13 in the winning), the above upper limit is set as the final acquisition number by the difference number image 411 in the pseudo ending effect. After notifying the increase number or the predetermined number of sheets, the difference number image 411 may be erased.

(27) In the second embodiment described above, the second difference number image 437 is displayed in the pseudo ending effect, but it may be configured not to display this. In this case, the second difference number image 437 may be displayed after the end of the pseudo ending effect, or the second difference number image 437 may not be displayed even after the end of the pseudo ending effect.

(28) In the second embodiment, the second difference number image 437 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and notified by the same notification means as the difference number image 411. However, the difference number image 411 is different from the difference number image 411. It may be configured to notify by different notification means. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the number of medals deviating from the number of medals notified by the difference number image 411 is displayed.

(29) In the second embodiment, the second difference number image 437 is displayed after the difference number image 411 is erased, but the second difference number image 437 is displayed in the situation where the difference number image 411 is displayed. The second difference number image 437 may be displayed regardless of whether or not the difference number image 411 is displayed (display status of the difference number image 411).

(30) In the second embodiment described above, the sub-difference number MY2 is not cleared even after the pseudo-ending effect is completed, and the update is continued as it is. However, when the pseudo-ending effect is completed, the sub-difference number is continued. You may clear MY2. Further, the sub-difference number MY2 may be cleared when the display of the difference number image 411 is finished in the pseudo ending effect.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed in the final game of the special ending effect, but it may be performed in the start game or the intermediate game of the special ending effect. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be performed as a set with the special ending effect, the setting suggestion effect may be performed without performing the special ending effect, and it is special if the upper limit increase number is expected to be reached. It may be performed before the ending effect is executed.

(32) In the second embodiment described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed as a privilege when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number after the execution of the pseudo ending effect, but the privilege is limited to the setting suggestion effect. It is not something that will be done. For example, a specific effect that is not normally executed may be released, or a character appearing in the effect or its costume may be released.

(33) In the first modification of the second embodiment, when the AT continuation suggestion effect (display of the notification image 451) is to be executed during the pseudo ending effect, which game the effect is to be executed is determined. Although it was decided by lottery, it may be executed in a game determined to execute the effect.

(34) In the first modification of the second embodiment, after the AT continuation suggestion effect is executed, the effect is continued until the end of the pseudo ending effect. For example, the AT continuation suggestion effect is executed in only one game. It may be ended before the end of the pseudo ending effect.

Further, a plurality of execution periods of the AT continuation suggestion effect may be prepared, and the AT continuation suggestion effect may be executed in the execution period selected from them. For example, if the number of remaining games in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect is grasped and the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the execution period of the AT continuation suggestion effect (execution game) is higher than that in the case of less than the predetermined number of games. The number) may be long. In this case, the length of the AT continuation suggestion effect suggests the size of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and not only the AT continuation suggestion effect is performed, but also the enjoyment of expecting that the execution period becomes longer. Can be granted.

(35) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect may be different depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect. For example, as an aspect of the AT continuation suggestion effect, a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect are provided, and when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number of games, the second aspect is selected. On the other hand, if the number of games is less than the predetermined number, the first mode is selected, or if the number of games is more than the predetermined number, the second mode is easier to be selected than when the number of games is less than the predetermined number. Can be done. With such a configuration, not only the AT continuation suggestion effect is performed, but also the enjoyment of predicting the size of the remaining games in the AT mode from the execution mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect can be given.

(36) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the second difference number image 437 is not displayed in the pseudo ending effect, but it may be displayed.

(37) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the AT winning effect may be performed in place of or in addition to the AT continuation suggestion effect to notify the winning of the AT mode. By performing the AT winning effect in the pseudo ending effect, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode is assigned in the middle of the ending effect and arouse the joy of the player.

(38) In the second modification of the second embodiment, the AT continuation suggestion effect cannot be executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is less than the second predetermined number of games. In this case, the AT is disabled. The configuration may be such that the continuous suggestion effect can be executed. At this time, when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the number of second predetermined games, it is preferable that the AT continuation suggestion effect is more easily executed than when the number of remaining games is less than the second predetermined number of games.

(39) In the second modification of the second embodiment, the AT continuation suggestion effect as in the first modification is executed in place of or in addition to the execution suggestion effect (display of the notification image 461) of the special ending effect. You may. In performing the AT continuation suggestion effect, the AT continuation suggestion effect is performed based on the continuation of the AT mode as in the modification example 1, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is expected to reach the upper limit increase number as in the modification example 2. It is advisable to make the notification mode different depending on the case where the AT continuation suggestion effect is performed based on the above. For example, it is conceivable that the display color of the broadcast image 461 is different between the former case and the latter case. According to such a configuration, not only the AT continuation suggestion effect is performed, but also the enjoyment of expecting that the effect is performed in a desired manner for the player can be imparted.

In some cases, the number of AT mode games is added after the AT continuation suggestion effect is started, and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is expected to reach the upper limit increase number. In this case, the AT continuation suggestion effect is in progress. It may be configured to change the notification mode with. Further, even in a situation where it is confirmed that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number at the start of the AT continuation suggestion effect, the AT continuation suggestion effect of the lower mode is initially performed, and then the AT continuation of the upper mode is continued. It may be configured to change (promote) the suggestion effect.

(40) In the second modification of the second embodiment, when the execution suggestion effect of the special ending effect is executed, the number of remaining games until the special ending effect may be notified in the subsequent games. Specifically, while grasping the number of remaining games until the special ending effect, the grasped number of remaining games is decremented and updated by 1 each time a game is played, and the result is auxiliary displayed as the above remaining number of games. Notify in section 65 or the like. In such a configuration, such notification may be performed in combination with the second difference number image 437, or may be performed in place of the second difference number image 437.

(41) In the second modification of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number during the execution of the pseudo ending effect, and the special ending is determined based on the result. The execution suggestion effect of the effect was executed, but in the game after the pseudo ending effect, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, and the execution suggestion effect of the special ending effect is performed based on the result. You may do it.

(42) In the third embodiment described above, the continuation effect (display of the notification image 471) is performed in the next game after the pseudo ending effect, but it is performed after a predetermined number of games after the pseudo ending effect is completed. May be good. Further, after the pseudo ending effect is completed, the continuous effect may be executed in correspondence with the winning of the push order bell (execution of the push order notification). For example, it is possible to execute a continuous effect in a winning game in which the push order bell is won (a game in which the push order notification is performed) or a game after the winning game (a game in which the push order notification is performed). can. In these cases, it is advisable to execute an effect different from the effect during the AT mode (for example, the effect for the normal mode) after the end of the pseudo ending effect until the effect for continuation is performed. With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to think that the AT mode has ended, and it is possible to suitably arouse the surprise and joy when the continuous production is performed.

(43) In the third embodiment, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect. For example, if the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the continuous effect is executed, but if the number of remaining games is less than the predetermined number, the continuous effect is not executed, or if the number of games is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. It is possible to make it easier to execute the continuous effect than when the number of games is less than the predetermined number.

(44) In the third embodiment, the privilege may be given when the AT end effect is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number after the execution of the pseudo ending effect. As such a privilege, it is conceivable to execute the setting suggestion effect as in the second embodiment.

It is advisable to use the freeze period to grant the above benefits. For example, it is set so that the freeze effect (the effect of waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 32L to 32R) is executed at the end of the game in which the number of MYs for increasing / decreasing the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number or at the start of the next game. .. On top of that, when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number and the normal ending effect is performed without executing the pseudo ending effect, the ending for the normal ending effect is used during the freeze effect period. Perform the end production. On the other hand, when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number in the state where the pseudo ending effect has been executed and the AT end effect is performed, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the freeze period. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that a freeze period similar to that of the normal ending effect occurs when the AT end effect is executed, and it is also expected to have the effect of suppressing the player's overlooking of the setting suggestion effect. can.

(45) In the third embodiment, the AT end effect is performed in response to the arrival of the upper limit increase number MY in the advantageous section increase / decrease, and this AT end effect is the game in which the upper limit increase number is reached. It may be performed during execution or at the end of the game. Further, the AT end effect may be performed over a plurality of games, and the AT end effect may be started from a game before the game that has reached the upper limit increase number.

(46) In the third embodiment, when the AT end effect is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, the rest of the AT mode notified by the effect during the AT mode. A configuration may be provided for adjusting the number of additional games indicated by the additional notification or the notification so that the number of games does not become larger than the AT mode end value (0 games). Specifically, as the number of remaining games in the AT mode after the pseudo-ending effect, after the number of games that can reach the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is secured, the number of games is added and the prize is won. It may also be provided with a configuration that restricts the additional notification from being performed.

In a situation where a large number of games remaining in the AT mode to be notified remain, when the AT end effect is performed and the AT mode ends based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, as a player In a situation where it is assumed that the AT mode will continue, the end of the AT mode will be suddenly announced, and there is a concern that the user may be confused as to whether it is a malfunction or the like, or may feel offended by the impression of loss. In this regard, by limiting the additional notification as described above, it is possible to suppress the AT end effect from being performed in a situation where a large number of remaining games in the AT mode remain, and it is possible to suppress the player's confusion. .. Depending on the number of games added during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect, the AT mode is notified in correspondence with the execution timing of the AT end effect (the timing when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number). Since it may be difficult to match the number of remaining games in the game with the end value, the following configuration is recommended.

The reference number is derived by subtracting a predetermined number (for example, 60) from the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number, and the required number of games until the reference number is reached is derived. The required number of games can be obtained by dividing the reference number by the net increase in the AT mode. After deriving the required number of games, the required number of games is decremented and updated by 1 each time the game is executed in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect.

Then, as a result of the increase in the number of remaining games in the AT mode due to the addition of the number of games in the AT mode, when the number of remaining games exceeds the required number of games, the additional notification is restricted. After that, when the number of games is further increased and the number of games exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined number is added (when the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is secured as the number of remaining games in AT mode), It shifts to the allowable state of additional notification. The additional notification at this time is performed within the range of the above-mentioned predetermined number of sheets. For example, if 70 games are added as the number of additional games, the notification is performed so that the total number of additional games does not exceed 60 games. In this case, the additional notification may be performed in one game or may be distributed in a plurality of games.

Then, after performing the additional notification for a predetermined number of sheets, the state shifts to the restricted state of the additional notification again. With such a configuration, the number of remaining games to be notified can be made to correspond to the end value according to the execution timing of the AT end effect.

In the above configuration, the predetermined number of sheets is subtracted from the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit increase number to obtain the reference number, but the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit increase number can also be used as the reference number of sheets. That is, it is also possible to derive the required number of games until the upper limit increase number is reached, and when the number of remaining games in the AT mode exceeds the required number of games, the configuration may be such that the additional notification is restricted. However, since the additional notification is not performed at all after the number of remaining games in the AT mode exceeds the required number of games, there is a concern that the player may get an unnatural impression. In this regard, the reference number is set by subtracting the predetermined number from the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number, and the additional notification is restricted before the required number of games up to the upper limit increase number is secured as the remaining number of games in AT mode. By shifting to, it is possible to secure a margin for additional notification after that.

In the case of the AT mode of the difference number type, the remaining difference number can be used instead of the remaining number of games in the AT mode.

(47) In the third embodiment, the sub-difference number MY2 is cleared at the end of the pseudo-ending effect, but the sub-difference number MY2 may be cleared at the start of the pseudo-ending effect or in the middle of the pseudo-ending effect. .. In these cases, it is preferable not to display the difference number image 411 based on the sub difference number MY2 until the effect during the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect is executed after the sub difference number MY2 is cleared.

(48) In the third embodiment, when the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number and the AT mode ends after the pseudo ending effect is executed, the second CZ mode effect is performed after the AT end effect. May be. In this case, the second CZ mode effect may be performed as a pseudo effect as in the fourth embodiment.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not to carry over the ending effect to the later advantageous section based on the number of medals acquired (main difference number MY1), but based on the number of digestion games in the AT mode. You may decide whether or not to carry over the ending effect to a later advantageous section. Specifically, when the number of AT mode digestion games executed in the advantageous section A is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (for example, 300 games), the normal ending effect is executed in the advantageous section A, and the number of digestion games is the same. If the number of games is less than the predetermined number, a pseudo ending effect may be executed in the later advantageous section B.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether or not the player is in the AT mode, and when the game is in the AT mode, the number of medals won is determined. Depending on the situation, it is determined whether or not to carry over the ending effect to the later advantageous section, and if the AT mode is not set, the ending effect may not be executed and the carry-over to the later advantageous section may not be executed. By configuring the normal ending effect to be executed in the AT mode or the pseudo ending effect to be executed later in the advantageous section B, the ending effect is performed in the situation where the number of medals is increasing. This is because it is easy to arouse the player's sense of accomplishment. It should be noted that, when not in the AT mode, an end effect (advantageous section fall effect) that is different from the ending effect and allows the player to recognize the end of the advantageous section may be executed.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined number of medals (2000) is determined in comparison with the maximum number of medals (2400) that can be obtained in one advantageous section, but the predetermined number of medals is determined regardless of the maximum number of medals. May be determined. For example, the predetermined number of sheets may be 1000.

(52) In the fourth embodiment, when the execution of the ending effect is carried over to the later advantageous section B, the pseudo ending effect is executed based on the fact that the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number. , The pseudo ending effect may be executed based on the number of medals acquired (main difference number MY1) in the later advantageous section B reaching a predetermined number (for example, 200).

(53) In the fourth embodiment, the pseudo ending effect is executed at the intermediate timing of the later advantageous section B, but the pseudo ending effect is executed when the later advantageous section B ends or ends. May be good. In this case, since the advantageous section actually ends when the ending effect is executed, it is possible to make it seem that the advantageous section has ended by reaching the upper limit.

(54) In the fourth embodiment, the modification 1 of the second embodiment may be applied so that the AT continuation suggestion effect can be executed during the pseudo ending effect. When the pseudo ending effect is performed, although the AT mode is internally continued even after that, there is a concern that the player will stop the game at the end of the pseudo ending effect, but the AT continues. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game after the pseudo-ending effect, and it is possible to suppress the end of the game triggered by the pseudo-ending effect.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section is determined when either the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number or the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number. Although it is configured to end, it may be configured to end the advantageous section when both of them are satisfied. Further, the configuration may include only one of the termination conditions.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, an end signal corresponding to the end of the advantageous section and an advantageous section signal corresponding to staying in the advantageous section are output to the external centralized terminal board 121 to manage and control the game hall. It may be configured to transmit to the device. In this case, the end signal and the advantageous section signal may be configured by one signal or may be configured by different signals.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration has two types, a normal section and an advantageous section. For example, a normal section that does not shift to the AT mode or the like and a first advantage that can shift to the AT mode or the like. It may be configured to have three or more types of states, such as having a section and a second advantageous section in which the ease of transition to the AT mode or the like is given preferential treatment over the first advantageous section.

(58) The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery are not limited to those exemplified in each of the above embodiments.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is configured to shift to the advantageous section, but the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is shifted to the advantageous section in the next game. Alternatively, a predetermined number of games may exist between the game winning the advantageous section transition lottery and the game transitioning to the advantageous section.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit (displayed) in response to a situation in which push order notification can be executed in an advantageous section (push order notification possible state). However, the above lighting may be performed in correspondence with the advantageous section itself. Specifically, the eighth display segment N8 may be started to be lit in the transition game to the advantageous section or the next game.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the transition lottery to the AT mode is performed only in the advantageous section, but the transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. For example, the above transition lottery may be performed when a predetermined combination (rare combination or the like) is won in the normal section. In that case, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section may be performed in accordance with the transition to the AT mode. Specifically, after winning the AT mode in the normal section, the game in which the transition to the AT mode and the transition to the advantageous section are the same (the next game of the AT mode winning game or the game after a predetermined number of games from the winning game). It is preferable to use the configuration performed in. It should be noted that the AT mode game is performed in an advantageous section as in each of the above-described embodiments.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases is illustrated as a bonus game, but the number of medals may not increase (does not increase or decrease) or may increase slightly (compared to in AT mode). The rate of increase in medals is low). As a bonus game with a slight increase, the expected net increase in the number of cards per game may be less than 0.5. Further, the medal may be increased normally (advantageous to the player) instead of a slight increase.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is guaranteed by making the structure in which the normal section is less likely to win the AT mode transition than the advantageous section.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, the game by the 3-bet game performed in a state where the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is described as a normal game, but the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. The game by the two-bet game performed in the state may be a normal game, or the second-bet game or the third-bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may be a normal game. Further, a game by a 2-bet game performed in a state where the second BB is carried over may be a normal game, or a game by a 3-bet game performed in a state where the first BB is carried over may be a normal game. Further, the game may be advanced while switching each of these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game is switched to any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example. Switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game may be regarded as a normal game.

(63) In each of the above-described embodiments, the payout rate is changed according to each set value, the setting 1 has the lowest payout rate, and the setting 6 has the highest payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of the number of balls (game medium) change depending on the situation. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The decrease in a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(64) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a reel and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(65) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball throwing and ball paying out function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type gaming machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using rotating body type gaming machine, a configuration having a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball ejection rate, etc., and the above inventions may be applied as suggestions for these set values and teaching effects. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and a predetermined state may be applied. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball entry rate to the ball entry portion is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 are set as the high ball entry state. Each invention may be applied. Further, in the pachinko machine, the period during which the 3-bet game is played in the standby period such as the precursor mode and the CZ mode (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is updated) is the game of the first special figure (the first special). It is applied to one of the period during which the variable display of the figure) is performed and the period during which the game of the second special figure (variable display of the second special figure) is performed. The period during which the game is played (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of the above modes is not updated) may be applied to the other of the period during which the game of the first special figure is performed and the period during which the game of the second special figure is performed.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, when a medal as a game medium is inserted, the number of bets is set and the game can be started, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny a medalless type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is described above. It is preferable to use a configuration in which a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which the game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it may be configured to notify information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups A to E are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. Regarding the background technique that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the gaming machines illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. "

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
A first game state end means (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Update means for updating predetermined update information (sub-difference number MY2, number of digested games in AT mode, etc.) based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in the number of medals increase / decrease, game digestion in AT mode, etc.) The function for executing the difference number management process by the sub-control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment) and
Specific notification execution means (display of difference number by sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments) that executes specific notification (difference number image 411, display of total number of games) based on the update result of the update means. Function to execute processing) and
The number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments that can hold the update result of the update means without initializing even after the first game state ends. Function to execute clear processing) and
After the holding is performed by the holding means, the renewal continuation means (subs according to the first to fourth embodiments) for continuing the renewal based on the predetermined renewal opportunity for the held renewal result. A function to continue updating the sub-difference number MY2 during the update period of the continuation counter in the process for clearing the sub-difference number by the control device 81).
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is a means for executing the specific notification based on the update result continuously updated by the update continuation means (process for displaying the difference number by the sub control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute.

As a gaming state, there is at least a first gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated, and a second gaming state in which such an instruction function does not operate, and the first gaming state. In the gaming machine configured to be able to play an advantageous specific state in the above, the player wins by updating the updated information such as the difference number in the first gaming state and notifying based on the result. There is something that can be recognized as one's own achievements. In such a gaming machine, the above-mentioned update information is initialized at the end of the first gaming state, so that the update result in the first gaming state later is separated from the update result in the first gaming state. Is grasped. Therefore, when the player can play the specific state in the first first game state first, and then reassign the specific state in the first game state after the transition, the specific state is specified in the later first game state. If the state ends early, the value of the update result will remain small, and the results indicated by the notification based on the update result will be poor. In this case, there was a concern that the lack of achievements would be emphasized rather than re-winning a specific state fortunately, giving the player an unsatisfactory impression.

In this respect, in this configuration, the update information is retained without being initialized even when the previous first game state ends, and in the later first game state, the update is continued for the retained update result. To. In this case, since the update result in the first game state is inherited and the update result in the first game state is derived, the update is performed even if the specific state ends early in the first game state later. It is possible to prevent the resulting value from staying small. Then, since the specific notification is executed based on such a result, it becomes easy for the player to notify the achievement that is easy to be satisfied with, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.)" of this feature is changed to the "specific state (AT mode, etc.) advantageous to the player from the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode)" or "predetermined non-specific state". It can also be expressed as "a specific state (AT mode or the like) in which the instruction function is easier to operate than the state (normal mode)".

Feature A2. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied in the first game state after the transition after the end of the first game state in which the specific state is executed (the predetermined number of games without winning the AT mode or the like). In the initialization means (in the process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81), which initializes the update information for which the update is continued by the update continuation means when the pseudo ending effect is completed, etc.). The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it has a function of executing a clearing process of a MY2 counter).

In the above configuration, when the initialization condition is satisfied in the first game state later, the inherited update result is initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the update information from being unnecessarily continued for a long time and the function as the performance notification is impaired.

Feature A3. Initialization means (sub-control device 81) that initializes the update information for which the update is continued by the update continuation means in the first game state after the transition to the first game state in which the specific state is executed ends. Function to execute the clearing process of the MY2 counter in the processing for clearing the number of sub-differences by
A means (sub) for limiting the initialization by the initialization means when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined number of games (such as when the AT mode is won) after the end of the first game state. (Functions for executing the processes of steps S3107, S3108, S3111 to S3115, etc.) in the process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the control device 81)
The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or the feature A2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 or the feature A2.

For example, if the update information is inherited even when the interval between the specific state in the first game state earlier and the specific state in the first game state later is widened, the relationship between the two specific states will be weakened and the sequence will be continued. There is a risk that the feeling of villainy will not be exhibited well. Further, when the update information is, for example, the difference number, the update result of the update information is obtained from the end of the previous first game state to the transition to the specific state in the later first game state. Since it changes in the decreasing direction, if the player is notified of such a decreasing state for a long period of time, the decrease in the game medium (held medals, etc.) is emphasized, and there is a concern that the player may have an unpleasant impression. In this respect, in this feature, after the end of the first game state, the update information is taken over when the specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined number of games, that is, when the specific condition is satisfied relatively quickly. Since the above is continued, not only can the impression that the specific state is continuous, but also the decrease in the game medium can be suppressed from being emphasized.

When this feature is applied to the feature A2, "the initialization is performed when a specific condition (such as when the AT mode is won) is satisfied before the initialization condition is satisfied in the first gaming state later". The initialization limiting means for limiting the initialization by the means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3107, S3108, and steps S3111 to S3115 in the process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81) is provided. It can also be expressed as "is."

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the specific condition is that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes the specific result or shifts to the specific state.

In the above configuration, after the end of the first gaming state, the updated information can be further taken over for the case where the specific state is won or the state is changed to the specific state within a predetermined number of games. As a result, it is suppressed that the updated information is inherited even when the interval between the specific state in the first game state earlier and the specific state in the first game state later is widened, and the specific state is a continuous villa. It is possible to give an impression like that.

Feature A5. The specific notification execution means is
A first means (a function of displaying the difference number image 411 in the advantageous section A by the sub control device 81) for executing the specific notification based on the update result of the update means in the first game state.
In the first gaming state after the transition after the end of the first gaming state, the second means (difference number in the advantageous section B by the sub control device 81) that executes the specific notification based on the update result of the update continuation means. Function to display image 411) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4, characterized in that the machine is provided with.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification corresponding to the update result is performed across the first game state and the first game state after the update, the continuity of the specific notification can be ensured. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the update information is continuously updated in the first game state of 1, even if the state is actually divided into the first and second game states before and after. Therefore, when the update result of the increased state in the first game state later is notified by the specific notification, it becomes easy for the player to have an impression that the achievement has increased, and the satisfaction of the player can be preferably aroused. It will be possible.

Feature A6. When the first gaming state is terminated by the first gaming state ending means, the second gaming state transitioning means for shifting to the second gaming state (due to the termination of the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Equipped with a function to shift to a normal section)
The update continuation means includes means for updating the predetermined update information in the second gaming state after the holding is performed by the holding means (a function of updating the sub-difference number MY2 in a normal section). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A5, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, since the update information is continuously updated even in the second game state intervening between the first first game state and the first game state after the first game state, the content of the specific notification is set in the second game state. Can be changed. As a result, the interruption of the first game state can be made more difficult to understand, and it is possible to easily give the player the impression that the update information is continuously updated in the first game state of 1.

Feature A7. As the state related to the specific determination by the specific determination means, it has a first state (normal mode) and a second state (second CZ mode) in which the specific result is more likely to be obtained than the first state.
After the end of the specific state, there are cases where the state shifts to the second state and cases where the state does not shift to the second state.
The feature is that the first gaming state is configured to end in response to the termination of the specific state unless the transition to the second state is performed after the termination of the specific state executed in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A6.

For example, if the configuration is such that re-winning to a specific state hardly occurs after the end of the specific state, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the game after the end of the specific state. Even if a specific notification is made based on the retention of the above, there is a concern that the player's interest in the notification remains low and the effect is not satisfactorily exhibited. In this respect, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, there is a case of shifting to the second state in which it is easy to win the specific state, so that the frequency of winning the specific state again after the end of the specific state is secured to a certain extent. As a result, the expectation of pulling back the specific state after the end of the specific state is induced, and it becomes possible to enhance the specific notification updated across the first gaming state.

Feature A8. After the end of the specific state, it is possible to shift to the second state in the first gaming state in which the specific state is performed.
The holding means does not shift to the second state after the end of the specific state executed in the first gaming state, and the first gaming state ends in response to the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is characterized by holding.

In the above configuration, since the first gaming state is continued as it is when the state shifts to the second state after the end of the specific state, the first gaming state is terminated while the updated information updated during the specific state is inherited. It is possible to have a state in which it is easy to re-win in a specific state without having to. On the other hand, if the first game state ends due to the end of the specific state without shifting to the second state after the specific state, the update information is retained without being initialized even after the first game state ends, thereby holding the update information. , The updated information updated during the specific state is inherited and continuously updated thereafter. That is, the update mode of the update information is standardized between the case of shifting to the second state after the specific state and the case of not shifting to the second state. As a result, when the first game state is actually interrupted without shifting to the second state after the specific state, it is as if the chance state is the same as when the second state is changed through the specific notification. It is possible to give an impression, and by extension, to make it easier for the player to feel that the specific state in the later first game state is caused by the continuous villa from the specific state performed in the previous first game state. Can be done.

Feature A9. In the first gaming state, the first update means for updating the first update information (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) based on the predetermined update opportunity (in the section display second process by the main control device 101, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY). Function to execute the update process) and
With the first initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2108 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) that initializes the update result of the first update means in correspondence with the end of the first game state. ,
The second update means (in the first to fourth embodiments) as the update means for updating the second update information (sub-difference number MY2) as the predetermined update information based on the predetermined update opportunity. (Function to execute the process for managing the difference number by the sub-control device 81) and
Equipped with
As the end condition of the first game state end means, a specific end condition for ending the first game state based on the update result of the first update means (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number). Including,
The holding means initializes the update result of the second update means even if the update result of the first update means is initialized in response to the end of the first gaming state by the first initialization means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A8, which is characterized in that it can be held without being held.

In the above configuration, in addition to the first update information used for the end control of the first game state, the second update information updated at the same update trigger as the first update information is provided, and the second update information is used. The update result to the first game state later is handed over, and the specific notification is performed based on the handed over update result. That is, in order to take over the update result to the first game state later for the second update information which is a substitute for the first update information, the end control of the first game state based on the update result of the first update information is performed. It is possible to continuously update the updated information and notify it without causing any trouble.

Feature A10. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
A second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that the game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the second updating means, the holding means, the updating continuing means, and the specific notification executing means are provided in the second control means.

In the above configuration, the process for handing over the second update information to the first game state and notifying the second update information is entrusted to the second control means. That is, since the second update information can be taken over and the specific notification can be performed independently of the control of the game progress performed by the first control means, the above-mentioned features A1 to A9 can be performed without interfering with the control of the game progress. It becomes possible to exert each of the above-mentioned effects.

Feature A11. The specific end condition is configured to be satisfied when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number).
The specific notification corresponding to a value larger than a predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined result (2400 or the number including the number of medals to be paid out when the push order bell is won in the situation where the difference number is 2399) The game according to feature A9 or feature A10, which comprises a specific limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S3803 by the sub-control device 81 according to the second embodiment) for limiting what is performed. Machine.

When the player knows in advance that the first game state will end when the update result of the first update information reaches a predetermined result, a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is indicated by the specific notification. , There is a concern that the player may have an unnatural impression and it may be easy to realize that the first game state has actually ended. In this respect, in this feature, since the execution of the specific notification having a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned unnatural state.

Feature A12. It is configured so that the specific end condition is satisfied when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (2400 sheets).
The update result of the first updating means is the predetermined result (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number). A first specific effect executing means (a function of executing a normal ending effect by the sub-control device 81 according to the second embodiment) capable of executing a specific effect (ending effect) in response to the operation).
The update result of the second update means is the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the upper limit increase number). ), And a second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a pseudo ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the second embodiment) capable of executing the specific effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A9 to the feature A11.

In the above configuration, the specific effect by the first specific effect execution means corresponding to the end of the first game state is actually executed when the update result of the first update information becomes or becomes a predetermined result. , When the update result of the second update information inherited from the previous first game state is the predetermined result of the specific effect by the second specific effect execution means which does not actually correspond to the end of the first game state. It is configured to be executed when it becomes. That is, when viewed with reference to the specific notification, in order to match the execution timing of the specific effect by the second specific effect execution means with the execution timing of the specific effect by the first specific effect execution means, the specification by the second specific effect execution means. You can make the production look more authentic. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player the impression that the upper limit has actually been reached, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of satisfaction and achievement.

Feature A13. After the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect execution means, if the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result, a predetermined privilege (execution of the setting suggestion effect). ) Is provided (a function of executing the process of step S3714 by the sub-control device 81 according to the second embodiment) of the gaming machine according to the feature A12. ..

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined result (upper limit value at which the first gaming state ends) after the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect execution means, the privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to provide not only the enjoyment of reaching the upper limit of the update result of the first update means but also the enjoyment of reaching the upper limit of the update result of the first update means via the execution of the specific effect.

Feature A14. The first specific effect executing means is
In the first gaming state, when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or when the predetermined result is obtained without the specific effect being executed by the second specific effect execution means. With the first means for executing the first specific effect (normal ending effect) as the specific effect (the function of setting the normal ending effect in the ending effect setting process by the sub control device 81 according to the second embodiment). ,
A mode different from the first specific effect when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result after the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect execution means. The special ending effect is performed in the ending effect setting process by the sub control device 81 according to the second embodiment (the second embodiment) for executing the second specific effect (special ending effect) of (the background image and the like are different). Function to set) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or the feature A13.

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first updating means reaches the upper limit via the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect of a mode different from the case of not passing through the execution of the specific effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to produce a special feeling that the update result of the first update means has reached the upper limit via the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the player's sense of accomplishment. Become.

Feature A15. The second specific effect execution means is for executing the first specific effect (pseudo ending effect) as the specific effect.
In the first specific effect executing means, after the first specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means, the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or becomes the predetermined result. In this case, the means (by the sub-control device 81 according to the second embodiment) for executing the second specific effect (special ending effect) in a mode different from the first specific effect (the background image or the like is different). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A12 to the feature A14, which is characterized by having a function of setting a special ending effect in the ending effect setting process).

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first update means reaches the upper limit after the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect execution means, a specific effect different from the specific effect by the second specific effect execution means is produced. Will be executed. As a result, it is possible to produce a special feeling that the update result of the first update means has reached the upper limit via the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the player's sense of accomplishment. Become.

Feature A16. After the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means, when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result, the first specific effect executing means causes the said. A12 characterized by being provided with means for limiting the execution of the specific effect (a function of executing the AT end effect instead of the ending effect by the sub-control device 81 according to the third embodiment). Or the gaming machine according to the feature A13.

The first update information is updated within the range of the first game state of 1, while the second update information can be updated across a plurality of first game states, so that the update results are different and the first (2) After the update result of the update information becomes the predetermined result, the update result of the first update information may become the predetermined result at an early stage. In such a case, if the specific effect is executed corresponding to the update result of the second update information being the predetermined result and the update result of the first update information being the predetermined result, in a short period of time. There is a concern that multiple specific effects will be executed, giving the player an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this feature, when the specific effect is performed by the second specific effect execution means in the process from the initial value until the update result of the first update information becomes a predetermined result, the specific effect is specified. Execution is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a plurality of specific effects in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Feature A17. It is provided with a game value giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for giving a predetermined game value (medals, credits, virtual game medium) when the specific prize is established.
The specific state is a state in which the instruction function is more likely to operate than a predetermined non-specific state (normal mode).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A16, wherein the updated information is numerical information corresponding to an increase / decrease in the game value.

In the above configuration, the numerical information (difference number information) corresponding to the increase / decrease in the game value is updated as the update information. In addition, the instruction function is more likely to operate in the specific state than in the non-specific state, and the game value is more likely to be given. In such a configuration, the notification based on the numerical information is easily recognized as the achievement that the player has won in the specific state. In such a case, when the player plays a specific state in the previous first game state and then reassigns the specific state in the first game state after the transition, the specific state is specified in the later first game state. When the state ends early, the value indicated by the notification based on the numerical information stays at a small value, giving the player an unsatisfactory impression even though the specific state is assigned in the first game state later. Cheap. By applying any of the configurations of the above-mentioned features A1 to A16 to such concerns, it becomes possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of each of the above-mentioned features.

Feature A18. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41) in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the predetermined result. A game value-giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding game values (medals, credits, virtual game media) corresponding to the results, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A17.

By applying any of the configurations of the features A1 to A17 to the slot machine having the above configurations, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature A19. The gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state, and the player in the first gaming state. It is a gaming machine configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous for the game.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the game state to the first game state.
The first game state ending means for ending the first gaming state (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) and
Update means for updating predetermined update information (sub-difference number MY2, number of digested games in AT mode, etc.) based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in the number of medals increase / decrease, game digestion in AT mode, etc.) The function for executing the difference number management process by the sub-control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment) and
Specific notification execution means (display of difference number by sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments) that executes specific notification (difference number image 411, display of total number of games) based on the update result of the update means. Function to execute processing) and
The number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments that can hold the update result of the update means without initializing even after the first game state ends. Function to execute clear processing) and
After the holding is performed by the holding means, the renewal continuation means (subs according to the first to fourth embodiments) for continuing the renewal based on the predetermined renewal opportunity for the held renewal result. A function to continue updating the sub-difference number MY2 during the update period of the continuation counter in the process for clearing the sub-difference number by the control device 81).
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is a means for executing the specific notification based on the update result continuously updated by the update continuation means (process for displaying the difference number by the sub control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the above feature A1. It is possible to apply any configuration of the above features A2 to A18 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features A1 to A19, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C17, the features D1 to D14, and the features E1 to E11 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
A first game state end means (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
When the first gaming state is terminated by the first gaming state ending means, the second gaming state transitioning means for shifting to the second gaming state (due to the termination of the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Function to shift to normal section) and
When the specific state is executed in the first game state and the specific state is executed in the first game state after the transition after the end of the first game state, the first game state after the first game state is executed. The notification content in the specific state or the specific state (displayed difference number, number of digested games, etc.) is related to the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the first gaming state. Specific means (subs A function to execute processing for displaying the difference number by the control device 81, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

As a gaming state, there is at least a first gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated, and a second gaming state in which such an instruction function does not operate, and the first gaming state. In a gaming machine configured to be able to play an advantageous specific state in the above, the game is divided for each first gaming state. Therefore, even if the player wins the specific state at an early stage in the later first game state after the first game state in which the specific state is played is completed, each specific state is perceived as independent. To. For this reason, there is a concern that the player may be given an unsatisfactory impression even though the specific state is assigned in the first game state afterwards.

In this respect, in this configuration, the specific state in the later first gaming state is related to the specific state in the earlier first gaming state, or the notification content in the specific state in the later first gaming state is the first. The specific notification is performed so that the player can recognize that it is related to the notification content in the specific state in the first gaming state. Therefore, the player is likely to be perceived by associating the specific state in each first game state. As a result, when the player assigns a specific state in the later first game state, even if the player is actually divided into the front and rear first game states via the second game state, the first game state of 1 It is possible to give the impression that the specific state is made to stay in a row or the specific state is pulled back, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.)" of this feature is changed to the "specific state (AT mode, etc.) advantageous to the player from the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode)" or "predetermined non-specific state". It can also be expressed as "a specific state (AT mode or the like) in which the instruction function is easier to operate than the state (normal mode)".

Feature B2. The specific means straddles the specific state in the first game state and the specific state in the subsequent first game state (difference number image 411, number of digestion games in AT mode, etc.). Display) The gaming machine according to feature B1, which is characterized in that it can be executed.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed straddling the specific state in the first first game state and the specific state in the later first game state, each specific state is easily linked through the specific notification. .. This makes it possible to give the impression that a specific state is made to stay in a row in the first game state of 1, even if the situation is divided into the first game state before and after.

Feature B3. The specific means is a means capable of executing the specific notification in the second gaming state between the first gaming state and the subsequent first gaming state (difference number image 411 in a normal section). The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or the feature B2, which is characterized by having a function of displaying the above.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is also executed in the second gaming state intervening between the first first gaming state and the subsequent first gaming state, the specific notification is interrupted due to the transition to the second gaming state. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the end of the first game state, and it is possible to easily give an impression that a specific state is made to stay in a row in the first game state of 1.

Feature B4. It is provided with a game value giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for giving a predetermined game value (medals, credits, virtual game medium) when the specific prize is established.
The specific state is a state in which the instruction function is more likely to operate than a predetermined non-specific state (normal mode).
The specific notification is a notification corresponding to the number of increase / decrease in game value (sub difference number MY2) or the number of executed games in the specific state (number of digested games in AT mode). The gaming machine described in either.

In the above configuration, the notification of the increase / decrease number of the game value performed in the specific state in the later first game state or the number of executed games in the specific state is performed in the specific state in the previous first game state. It is done in relation to the notification. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an impression that each specific state executed in the first and previous game states is related.

Feature B5. The specific means is the first increase / decrease number, which is the increase / decrease number when the specific state in the first game state is completed, as the specific notification in the specific state in the first game state after that. Alternatively, the number of increases / decreases during the period from the end of the specific state in the first game state to the time when the specific state is performed in the subsequent first game state is added to the first increase / decrease number. 2 The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that it is possible to execute continuous notification according to the number of increase / decrease.

In the above configuration, in the specific state in which the notification that is the continuation of the increase / decrease number of the game value notified in the specific state in the first game state and the number of digestion games in the specific state shifts in the later first game state. Will be done. That is, since the specific notification in the specific state related to the later first game state is performed so as to inherit the actual results of the specific state related to the first first game state, the impression that those specific states are related is given. It can be given strongly, and it becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification.

Feature B6. The specific means is specified when the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes the specific result or shifts to the specific state within a predetermined number of games after the end of the first gaming state. Feature B1 characterized by being provided with means for enabling notification (a function of executing the processes of steps S3107, S3108, and steps S3111 to S3115 in the process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B5.

For example, in the case where the interval between the specific state in the first first game state and the specific state in the subsequent first game state is greatly widened, the game medium (held medal, etc.) is opened by the gap. Since there is a possibility that the number has decreased significantly, even if the specific notification promotes a feeling of consecutive villas, there is a risk that the player will have an unpleasant impression. In this respect, in this feature, after the end of the first game state, if the specific state is won or the state shifts to the specific state within a predetermined number of games, that is, the winning of the specific state in a relatively short period of time, etc. It is configured to make an association by specific notification for the case where it occurs. As a result, the specific notification can be performed in a situation where the game medium is not reduced and the player is likely to be pleased, and the effect of the specific notification can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B7. Update means for updating predetermined update information (sub-difference number MY2, number of digested games in AT mode, etc.) based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in the number of medals increase / decrease, game digestion in AT mode, etc.) The function for executing the difference number management process by the sub-control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment) and
The number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments that can hold the update result of the update means without initializing even after the first game state ends. Function to execute clear processing) and
After the holding is performed by the holding means, the renewal continuation means (subs according to the first to fourth embodiments) for continuing the renewal based on the predetermined renewal opportunity for the held renewal result. A function to continue updating the sub-difference number MY2 during the update period of the continuation counter in the process for clearing the sub-difference number by the control device 81).
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6, wherein the specific means is capable of executing specific notification based on the update result.

In the above configuration, even if the first game state ends, the update result of the predetermined update information is not initialized, and is inherited by the later first game state. Since the specific notification is performed based on the inherited update result, the value corresponding to the continuation of the specific state executed in the previous first game state is notified in the specific state in the later first game state. .. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an impression that each specific state is related, and it is possible to preferably perform specific notification.

Feature B8. First update means for updating the first update information (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) based on the predetermined update opportunity in the first game state (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the section display second process by the main control device 101, etc.) Function to execute the update process) and
A first initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2108 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) that initializes the update result of the first update means when the first game state ends.
The second update means (in the first to fourth embodiments) as the update means for updating the second update information (sub-difference number MY2) as the predetermined update information based on the predetermined update opportunity. (Function to execute the process for managing the difference number by the sub-control device 81) and
Equipped with
As the end condition of the first game state end means, a specific end condition for ending the first game state based on the update result of the first update means (advantageous that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY reaches the upper limit increase number). Including the number of section games AG reaches the maximum number of games, etc.)
The holding means initializes the update result of the second update means even if the update result of the first update means is initialized in response to the end of the first gaming state by the first initialization means. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized in that it can be held without being held.

In the above configuration, in addition to the first update information used for the end control of the first game state, the second update information updated at the same update trigger as the first update information is provided, and the second update information is used. The update result to the first game state later is handed over, and the specific notification is performed based on the handed over update result. That is, in order to take over the update result to the first game state later for the second update information which is a substitute for the first update information, the end control of the first game state based on the update result of the first update information is performed. It is possible to continuously update the updated information and notify it without causing any trouble.

Feature B9. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
A second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that the game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the second renewal means, the holding means, the renewal continuation means, and the specific means are provided in the second control means.

In the above configuration, the process for handing over the second update information to the first game state and notifying the second update information is entrusted to the second control means. That is, since the second update information can be taken over and the specific notification can be performed independently of the control of the game progress performed by the first control means, the feature B1 to the feature B8 can be performed without interfering with the control of the game progress. It becomes possible to exert each of the above-mentioned effects.

Feature B10. It is configured so that the specific end condition is satisfied when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number, etc.).
A value larger than the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined result (2400, or the number of medals to be paid out when the push order bell is won in the situation where the difference is 2399 or the 1500th game). The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, which comprises a specific limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S3803 by the sub control device 81) for limiting the corresponding specific notification.

When the player knows in advance that the first game state will end when the update result of the first update information reaches a predetermined result, a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is indicated by the specific notification. , There is a concern that the player may have an unnatural impression and it may be easy to realize that the first game state has actually ended. In this respect, in this feature, since the execution of the specific notification having a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned unnatural state.

Feature B11. It is configured so that the specific end condition is satisfied when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number, etc.).
The update result of the first updating means is the predetermined result (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number). A first specific effect executing means (a function of executing a normal ending effect by the sub-control device 81 according to the second embodiment) capable of executing a specific effect (ending effect) in response to the operation).
The update result of the second update means is the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the upper limit increase number). ), And a second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a pseudo ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the second embodiment) capable of executing the specific effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B8 to the feature B10.

In the above configuration, the update of the second update information inherited to the later first game state corresponds to the execution of the specific effect when the update result of the first update information becomes or becomes a predetermined result. It is configured to execute a specific effect when the result becomes or becomes a predetermined result. As a result, even if the first game state is actually interrupted in the middle, the player can be given the impression that the upper limit has been reached in the first game state of 1, and the player's satisfaction and achievement can be given. It becomes possible to arouse a feeling.

It is possible to apply any of the configurations of the features A13 to the features A18 to the features B1 to B11. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature B12. The gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state, and the player in the first gaming state. It is a gaming machine configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous for the game.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the game state to the first game state.
The first game state ending means for ending the first gaming state (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) and
A second game state transition means for shifting to the second game state when the first game state is terminated by the first game state end means (usually due to the end of an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to shift to the section) and
When the specific state is executed in the first game state and the specific state is executed in the first game state after the transition after the end of the first game state, the first game state after the first game state is executed. The specific notification (specific notification) that allows the player to recognize that the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the above-mentioned specific state is related to the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the first gaming state. Execution of the process for displaying the difference number by the sub-control device 81 according to the first to fourth embodiments, which is a specific means capable of executing the difference number image 411, the display of the number of digested games in the AT mode, etc. Functions, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the above feature B1. It is possible to apply any of the configurations from the feature B2 to the feature B11 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features B1 to B12, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C17, the features D1 to D14, and the features E1 to E11 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
Update means (main control) for updating specific update information (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, advantageous section game number AG, etc.) based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in medal increase / decrease number, game digestion, etc.) in the first game state. (Function to execute update processing such as advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the section display second processing by the device 101) and
In the specific end means (second process of section display by the main control device 101) that ends the first game state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number). Advantageous section increase / decrease number (function to end the advantageous section based on the update result such as MY) and
Specific effect execution means (second and third) for executing a specific effect (ending effect) in which a specific result notification (display of the final number of acquired sheets, etc.) is performed after a predetermined effect (ending effect) is performed over a plurality of games. The function of executing the ending effect setting process and the ending effect execution process by the sub-control device 81 according to the embodiment of
Equipped with
The specific effect executing means is
A first means (a function of executing a normal ending effect) that causes a specific effect to be executed in response to the end of the first game state by the specific end means.
A second method for executing the specific effect when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the end is not performed by the specific end means (for example, when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number). Means (function to execute pseudo ending effect) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the specific state advantageous to the player is shifted to the first game state in which the player can play. In the first game state, the update information is updated based on a predetermined update opportunity, and when the result becomes a specific result, the first game state is forcibly terminated by the specific end means. Then, when such a forced termination is performed, a specific effect is executed as an effect corresponding to the forced termination. Under such a configuration, in this feature, the specific effect is executed when the specific condition is satisfied even in the situation where the forced termination is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing such a pseudo specific effect, the player can be made to recognize when the first gaming state is completed even if the first gaming state is not actually terminated. That is, since the first gaming state can be continued after the first gaming state is thought to end, the joy and surprise of the player can be suitably aroused. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, the "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.)" of this feature is changed to the "specific state (AT mode, etc.) advantageous to the player from the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode)" or "predetermined non-specific state". It can also be expressed as "a specific state (AT mode or the like) in which the instruction function is easier to operate than the state (normal mode)". In addition, "when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the situation where the end is not performed by the specific end means (when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number, etc.)" of this feature is "the specific". It can also be expressed as "based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (sub difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number, etc.) without corresponding to the end by the end means".

Feature C2. The second means is a means for executing the specific effect in the specific state (the sub-control device 81 according to the second and third embodiments executes the pseudo ending effect during the execution of the AT mode. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized by having a function).

In the above configuration, since the specific effect by the second means is executed in the specific state, it is possible to produce the specific effect so that the specific state continues even after the specific effect is performed. In this case, from the player's point of view, it was thought that the specific state would end with the end of the first game state due to the execution of the above-mentioned specific effect, but it seems that the specific state continues after that, contrary to expectations. It is possible to appropriately arouse the joy and surprise of the player.

Feature C3. It is provided with a grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S3614 by the sub control device 81) for grasping a predetermined remaining number (the remaining number of games in the AT mode or the remaining difference number) corresponding to the rest of the specific state.
The second means is a means for executing a specific effect when the predetermined remaining number grasped by the grasping means is a predetermined number or more (processing of steps S3615 and S3616 by the sub-control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

For example, if the specific effect by the second means ends in the middle or becomes shorter than the specific effect by the first means, an unnatural impression may be obtained and it may be easily realized that the specific effect is a pseudo specific effect. .. In this respect, in the above configuration, the rest of the specific state is grasped, and the above-mentioned specific effect is executed for the case where a certain amount or more of the rest exists. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from ending in the middle or being restricted shortly, and to prevent an unnatural impression.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the predetermined number is an addition value obtained by adding a specific number to the remaining number required for executing the specific effect.

For example, if the specific state ends early after the end of the specific effect by the second means, the player is disappointed, and as a result, the joy is halved, and there is a concern that the effect of the pseudo specific effect cannot be fully utilized. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific effect is executed for the case where the remaining of the grasped specific state is equal to or more than the addition value obtained by adding the specific number to the remaining number required for executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed after the specific effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect after securing a certain period of duration of the specific state of. As a result, it is possible to suppress the early termination of the specific state after the specific effect, and it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player.

Feature C5. A predetermined notification executing means (AT continuation suggestion effect, continuation effect) capable of executing a predetermined notification (AT continuation suggestion effect, continuation effect) corresponding to the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific result during the execution of the specific effect by the second means (AT continuation suggestion effect, continuation effect). The sub-control device 81 according to the first modification of the second embodiment has a function of executing an AT continuation suggestion effect or a function of executing a continuation effect by the sub-control device 81 according to the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C4, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, during the execution of the specific effect by the second means, the player himself / herself can continue the specific state or win the specific state because the predetermined notification corresponding to the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific state is performed. It can give the impression of being assigned. Further, although the specific effect by the second means is actually a pseudo one that does not correspond to the end of the first game state (specific state), the player stops the game when the specific effect ends. It is possible that it will end up. In this respect, by performing the above-mentioned predetermined notification, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game after the specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game and suffering a disadvantage.

It should be noted that this feature may further include the feature that "the execution of the predetermined notification is restricted during the execution of the specific effect by the first means". In addition, the "predetermined notification corresponding to the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific result" of this feature is "a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific result". It can also be expressed as.

Feature C6. Remaining grasping means (second) for grasping a specific remaining number (the number of remaining games or the remaining difference number in the AT mode after the pseudo ending effect) corresponding to the rest of the specific state after the end of the specific effect by the second means. A function of executing the process of step S4001 by the sub-control device 81 according to the first modification of the embodiment) is provided.
The predetermined notification is executed when the specific remaining number grasped by the remaining grasping means is equal to or more than a predetermined number (second predetermined number of games), or the predetermined notification is executed more than when the predetermined number is less than the predetermined number. The feature C5 is characterized by being provided with means for facilitating the process (a function of executing the processes of steps S4002 and S4003 by the sub-control device 81 according to the first modification of the second embodiment). The described gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the rest of the specific state after the end of the specific effect by the second means is grasped, and the execution presence / absence and the execution frequency of the predetermined notification are controlled based on whether or not the remaining amount is a predetermined number or more. As a result, in a situation where the specific state ends early after the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the specific state or the suggestion of winning by the predetermined notification.

Feature C7. A first renewal means as the renewal means is provided.
The first update means updates the first update information as the predetermined update information, and is configured to update the first update information in the first gaming state of 1.
A second update means (difference by the sub control device 81) capable of updating the second update information (sub difference number MY2, AT mode digestion game number, etc.) across the plurality of first game states based on the predetermined update opportunity. Function to execute the number management process) and
Equipped with
The second means is provided with means for executing a specific effect based on the update result of the second update means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3613 to S3617 by the sub-control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C6.

In the above configuration, the second update information that can be updated across a plurality of first game states is provided, and the specific effect by the second means is executed based on the update result of the second update information, so that the first is actually the first. Even when the game state is terminated in the middle, the specific effect can be executed as if the first game state is not interrupted. Further, since the second update information is updated at the same update trigger as the first update information used for the end control of the first game state, the behavior until the specific effect is executed can be changed by the first means. It can be made similar to the case where it is performed, and the pseudo specific effect by the second means can be made to look more authentic. In addition, by executing the specific effect by the second means with reference to the second update information, the execution control of the specific effect is performed independently of the end control of the first gaming state using the first update information. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suitably balance the appropriate end control of the first game state and the execution control of the pseudo specific effect.

Feature C8. In the first means, the update result of the first update means is the predetermined result (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result is obtained (the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY). Is to reach the upper limit increase number), and the specific effect is executed.
In the second means, the update result of the second update means is the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number) or the predetermined result (the sub-difference number MY2 is the upper limit). The gaming machine according to feature C7, which is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in response to (reaching an increase number).

In the above configuration, the true specific effect by the first means is executed when the update result of the first update information becomes or becomes a predetermined result, and then the pseudo specific effect by the second means is performed. It is configured to be executed when the update result of the second update information becomes or becomes a predetermined result. That is, since the execution timing of the specific effect by the second means is matched with the execution timing of the specific effect by the first means, the specific effect by the second means can be made to look more authentic. As a result, not only can the player's sense of satisfaction and achievement be aroused, but also the player's joy and surprise that the first game state continues after the specific effect can be suitably enhanced.

Feature C9. When the second update information is updated across at least a plurality of the first gaming states, the specific notification (difference number image 411) corresponding to the update result of the second update means is executed. The gaming machine according to feature C8, which comprises a notification executing means (a function of executing a process for displaying a difference number of sheets by a sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, the update result of the second update information updated across the plurality of first game states is notified by the specific notification, so that even if the first game state is actually terminated in the middle, it is as if 1 It can be made to appear that the first game state of is continuing. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed by the second means, it is possible to give the impression that the specific effect is performed by reaching the upper limit, and it is possible to make the specific effect look more authentic.

Feature C10. A value larger than the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined result (2400, or the number of medals to be paid out when the push order bell is won in the situation where the difference is 2399 or the 1500th game). The gaming machine according to feature C9, which comprises a specific limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S3803 by the sub control device 81) for limiting the corresponding specific notification.

When the player knows in advance that the first game state will end when the update result of the first update information reaches a predetermined result, a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is indicated by the specific notification. , There is a concern that the player may have an unnatural impression and it may be easy to realize that the first game state has actually ended. In this respect, in this feature, since the execution of the specific notification having a value larger than the value corresponding to the predetermined result is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned unnatural state.

Feature C11. A second specific notification execution means for executing a second specific notification (second difference number image 437) corresponding to the update result of the first update means during or after the execution or end of the specific effect by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature C9 or feature C10, which comprises (a function of executing a process for displaying the difference number of sheets by the sub control device 81 according to the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, both the specific notification based on the update result of the second update information and the second specific notification based on the update result of the first update information are performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the actual value corresponding to the end control of the first game state cannot be recognized or is difficult to recognize.

In this feature, the second specific notification execution means is provided with a means for limiting the execution of the specific notification in a predetermined case (when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number). The second specific notification is provided with a means for executing the second specific notification during at least a part of the limited period (during or after the execution of the pseudo ending effect) in which the execution of the specific notification is restricted. " May be good.

Feature C12. After the specific effect is executed by the second means, a predetermined privilege (execution of the setting suggestion effect) is given when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or when the predetermined result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C8 to the feature C11, which is provided with a privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S3714 by the sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined result (upper limit value at which the first game state ends) after the specific effect is executed by the second means, a privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to provide not only the enjoyment of reaching the upper limit of the update result of the first update means but also the enjoyment of reaching the upper limit of the update result of the first update means via the execution of the specific effect.

Feature C13. The first means is
In the first gaming state, when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result is obtained without executing the specific effect by the second means, the first as the specific effect. The first specific effect means (a function of setting the normal ending effect in the ending effect setting process by the sub control device 81) for executing the specific effect (normal ending effect), and
After the specific effect is executed by the second means, the specific effect is different from the first specific effect when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result (the specific effect). A second specific effect means (a function of setting a special ending effect in the ending effect setting process by the sub control device 81) for executing the second specific effect (special ending effect) of (the background image and the like are different), and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C8 to the feature C12.

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first updating means reaches the upper limit via the execution of the specific effect by the second means, the specific effect of a mode different from the case of not going through the execution of the specific effect is executed. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to produce a special feeling that the update result of the first update means has reached the upper limit via the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the player's sense of accomplishment. Become.

Feature C14. After the specific effect is executed by the second means, the execution of the specific effect by the first means is restricted when the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or when the predetermined result is obtained. Described in any one of the feature C8 to the feature C10, which comprises means for making the AT end effect (a function of executing an AT end effect instead of the ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the third embodiment). Gaming machine.

The first update information is updated within the range of the first game state of 1, while the second update information can be updated across a plurality of first game states, so that the update results are different and the first (2) After the update result of the update information becomes the predetermined result, the update result of the first update information may become the predetermined result at an early stage. In such a case, if the specific effect is executed corresponding to the update result of the second update information being the predetermined result and the update result of the first update information being the predetermined result, in a short period of time. There is a concern that multiple specific effects will be executed, giving the player an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this feature, when the specific effect is performed by the second means in the process from the initial value until the update result of the first update information becomes a predetermined result, the specific effect is executed. Be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a plurality of specific effects in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Feature C15. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41) in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the predetermined result. A game value-giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding game values (medals, credits, virtual game media) corresponding to the results, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C14.

By applying any of the configurations of the features C1 to C14 to the slot machine having the above configurations, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature C16. The gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state, and the player in the first gaming state. It is a gaming machine configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous for the game.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific result is obtained. Specific state transition means (function to execute AT mode transition processing by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state (when the precursor mode ends, etc.) and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
A first game state end means (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Sub-control device 81 according to the second and third embodiments, which controls a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) so that the specific effect (ending effect) is executed in a predetermined case. (Function to execute ending effect setting process, ending effect execution process),
Equipped with
The specific effect executing means is
A normal ending effect is executed by the sub-control device 81 according to the first means (second and third embodiments) for executing the specific effect (ending effect) in response to the end of the first gaming state. Function) and
A second means (first) for executing a specific effect when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the first game state is not terminated (for example, when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number). 2 and the function of executing the pseudo ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the third embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the specific effect can be executed according to the end of the first game state, and the specific effect can be executed even when the end is not performed when the specific condition is satisfied. .. According to such a configuration, by performing a specific effect in a situation where the first game state does not end, even if the first game state does not actually end, the player is notified when the first game state ends. Can be recognized. That is, since the first gaming state can be continued after the first gaming state is thought to end, the joy and surprise of the player can be suitably aroused. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

It is possible to apply any configuration of the above features C2 to C15 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature C17. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
Update means (main control) for updating specific update information (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, advantageous section game number AG, etc.) based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in medal increase / decrease number, game digestion, etc.) in the first game state. (Function to execute update processing such as advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the section display second processing by the device 101) and
In the specific end means (second process of section display by the main control device 101) that ends the first game state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number). Advantageous section increase / decrease number (function to end the advantageous section based on the update result such as MY) and
A first means (a function of executing a normal ending effect) that causes a specific effect (ending effect) to be executed in response to the end of the first game state by the specific end means.
When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the end is not performed by the specific end means (such as when the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number), the specific effect (pseudo similar to the normal ending effect). A second means (a function of executing a pseudo-ending effect) for executing a predetermined effect (a pseudo-ending effect different from the normal ending effect) corresponding to the specific effect) or the specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the above feature C1. It is possible to apply any configuration of the above features C2 to C15 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations. When applying any of the configurations of the feature C2 to the feature C15 to the present feature, the "specific effect" executed by the second means can be paraphrased as "specific effect or predetermined effect".

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features C1 to C17, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C17, the features D1 to D14, and the features E1 to E11 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
In the first gaming state, the first update means for updating the first update information (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, advantageous section game number AG, etc.) (in the section display second process by the main control device 101, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, etc.) Function to execute the update process) and
Specific end means for ending the first game state based on the update result of the first update means (end the advantageous section based on the update result of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to make) and
A second update means (a function of executing a process for managing the difference number by the sub control device 81) for updating the second update information (sub difference number MY2) in the first game state, and
The specific notification execution means (function for executing the difference number display process by the sub control device 81) for executing the specific notification (difference number image 411) based on the update result of the second update means, and
Initialization means for initializing the second update information updated by the second update means (processing for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81 according to the third embodiment, processing for clearing the number of second sub-differences). Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The initialization means is
A first means (a function of executing a process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81) for performing the initialization in response to the end of the first gaming state, and
A second means (process for clearing the second sub-difference number by the sub-control device 81) for performing the initialization when a predetermined specific condition (end of pseudo ending effect) is satisfied in a situation where the first game state is not terminated. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

As a gaming state, there is at least a first gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated, and a second gaming state in which such an instruction function does not operate, and the first gaming state. In the gaming machine configured to be able to play an advantageous specific state in the above, the player wins by updating the updated information such as the difference number in the first gaming state and notifying based on the result. There are gaming machines that can be recognized as their own achievements. Further, in such a gaming machine, there is one that terminates the first gaming state based on the update result of the above-mentioned update information. Under such circumstances, the second update information is provided separately from the first update information used for the end control of the first game state, and the specific notification is executed based on the update result. In this case, not only the first means for initializing the update result of the second update information corresponding to the end of the first game state, but also the second means due to the establishment of the specific condition in the situation where the first game state does not end. A second means for initializing the update result of the update information is further provided. When initialization is performed by each of these means, notification corresponding to the initial value of the second update information is performed as a specific notification. Therefore, by performing initialization in a situation where the first gaming state is not terminated by the second means. , When the first game state is completed, the player can be made to think that the first game state is continued, and then the first game state can be continued. As a result, the joy and surprise of the player can be appropriately aroused, and the fun of the game can be improved. Moreover, since the initialization control of the second update information can be performed independently of the first update information, the initialization can be performed at a special timing without interfering with the end control of the first game state. It will be possible.

It should be noted that the "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.)" of this feature can also be expressed as "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.) rather than the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode)". ..

Feature D2. The specific notification executing means executes the specific notification based on the update result of the second update means updated for the initialized second update information after the initialization by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is provided with means (a function of displaying a difference number image 411 in an effect during AT mode after a pseudo ending effect).

In the above configuration, after initialization is performed in a situation where the first gaming state is not terminated by the second means, the result of updating the initialized second update information is notified by the specific notification. In this case, during the execution period of the specific notification including the initialization timing, the player recognizes that the value indicated by the specific notification returns to the initial value by the initialization. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably think that the first gaming state has ended, and it is possible to enhance the effect of inviting the joy and surprise of the player.

Feature D3. The second means is provided with means for performing the initialization in the specific state (a function of clearing the MY2 counter during the AT mode in the process for clearing the second sub-difference number by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2.

Since the specific state advantageous to the player can be transferred only in the first game state, when the first game state is terminated by the specific end means in the situation where the specific state is executed, the end of the first game state is reached. Along with this, the specific state also ends. In view of such characteristics, by performing initialization by the second means while the specific state is being executed, it is possible to make the player think that the specific state has ended. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to continue the specific state while pretending that the specific state has ended, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the joy and surprise of the player.

Feature D4. A means for grasping a predetermined remaining number (the number of remaining games in the AT mode or the remaining number of differences) corresponding to the rest of the specific state is provided.
The second means performs the initialization when the predetermined remaining number grasped by the grasping means is equal to or more than a predetermined number (addition value obtained by adding a specific number of games to the number of games required to execute a pseudo ending effect). The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that it is provided with means for performing the game.

For example, if the specific state ends early after the initialization by the second means, the player is discouraged, and as a result, the joy is halved, and there is a concern that the effect of the initialization at the special timing may not be fully utilized. In this respect, in this configuration, since the initialization is performed after the duration of the specific state after the initialization is secured to some extent, it is suppressed that the specific state ends early after the initialization, and the player's It is possible to suppress discouragement.

Feature D5. A predetermined notification executing means (third embodiment) capable of executing a predetermined notification (continuation effect) corresponding to the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific result after the initialization by the second means. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or the feature D4, which is provided with a function of executing a continuous effect by the sub-control device 81 according to the above.

In the above configuration, after the initialization by the second means, the predetermined notification corresponding to the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific state is performed, so that the player himself / herself is in the specific state before the initialization or after the initialization. It can give the impression of continuing or winning. Further, although the initialization by the second means is a pseudo-thing that does not actually correspond to the end of the first gaming state (specific state), the player stops the game with the initialization as a trigger. It is also possible. In this respect, by performing the above-mentioned predetermined notification, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game after the initialization, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game and suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, the "predetermined notification corresponding to the continuation of the previous specific state or the winning of the specific result" of this feature is "a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the continuation of the specific state or the winning of the specific result". It can also be expressed as.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the second updating means can update the second updating information across a plurality of the first gaming states.

For example, if the second update information is updated only within the range of the first gaming state of 1, there is a concern that the update range remains narrow. In this respect, since the second update information can be updated across a plurality of first game states, it becomes easy to expand the update range to the same extent as the first update information. Therefore, it is possible to give the impression that the initialization by the second means is the initialization of the first update information, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the initialization at the special timing.

Feature D7. It is provided with a first game state end means (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
As the end condition, a second end condition corresponding to the end of the specific end means and a second end condition that can be satisfied in a situation where the first end condition is different from the first end condition and the first end condition is not satisfied. It has multiple types of end conditions including end conditions (end of AT mode, end of second CZ mode).
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first gaming state ending means terminates the first gaming state when any of the plurality of types of ending conditions is satisfied.

In the above configuration, not only the first end condition (the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined result) is satisfied, but also the second end condition is satisfied before the first end condition is satisfied. The gaming state may end. In such a case, since the period of the first gaming state is shortened, if the second update information is updated within the range of the first gaming state of 1, the update range is narrowed. By applying the configuration of the feature D6 to such a configuration, it is possible to widen the update range of the second update information even in a situation where the period of the first gaming state is short, which is particularly effective.

Feature D8. The specific end means is configured to perform the end when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number).
In the second means, the means for performing the initialization corresponding to the update result of the second update means becoming the predetermined result (the specific number of games is digested after the sub-difference number MY2 reaches the ending start number). The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, characterized in that it is provided with a function of clearing the MY2 counter in the event of a failure.

Under the configuration in which the first gaming state is terminated by the specific end means when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined result, in this feature, the update result of the second update means becomes a predetermined result. Then, initialization is performed by the second means. That is, the initialization by the second means is performed according to the value indicated by the specific notification based on the update result of the second update means becoming the value corresponding to the predetermined result corresponding to the end of the first gaming state. .. Therefore, it is possible to give the impression that the initialization by the second means is the initialization when the upper limit of the first gaming state is reached, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the initialization at the special timing.

Feature D9. The specific end means is configured to perform the end when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined predetermined result (upper limit increase number, upper limit game number).
When the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or when the predetermined result is obtained, the specific effect execution means (normal ending effect by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific effect (ending effect) is executed. Function) and
When the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or when the predetermined result is obtained in the first gaming state in which the initialization by the second means is performed, the specific effect executing means is used. A limiting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3610 and S5101 by the sub-control device 81) capable of limiting the execution of the specific effect, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D6 to the feature D8.

Since the initialization by the second means is performed in the situation where the first game state is not completed, that is, during the update of the first update information, the update result of the first update means after the initialization by the second means is performed. Is inevitably shorter than the period until a predetermined result is obtained without such initialization. After the initial value is shown by the specific notification due to the initialization by the second means, after such a short period of time, when the specific effect corresponding to the end of the first gaming state by the specific end means is performed, the player There is a concern that it may give an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this feature, since the execution of the specific effect is restricted in such a case, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression.

Feature D10. When the update result of the first update means becomes the predetermined result or the predetermined result in the first gaming state in which the initialization by the second means is performed, the end of the specific state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature D9, which comprises means for executing a corresponding predetermined end effect (AT end effect) (a function of executing the processing of step S3610 and step S5101 by the sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the update result of the first update means becomes a predetermined result in the first game state where the initialization by the second means is performed and the first game state is terminated by the specific end means, the specific effect is obtained. Instead, a predetermined end effect corresponding to the end of the specific state is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the end of the first game state corresponding to the end of the specific state is not the end of the first game state due to the arrival of the upper limit, and the first is suppressed from giving an unnatural impression. 1 It becomes possible to make the player recognize the end of the gaming state.

Feature D11. A first specific effect executing means (a function of executing a normal ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the third embodiment) capable of executing a specific effect (ending effect) when the first game state ends.
A second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a pseudo ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the third embodiment) capable of executing the specific effect in a situation where the first game state is not terminated.
Means for ensuring that the execution of the specific effect by the second specific effect execution means and the initialization by the second means are performed in correspondence with each other (at the time of disclosure of the pseudo ending effect, during or after the execution, the number of sub-differences MY2 Function to clear), and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D10.

In the above configuration, where the specific effect is performed in response to the end of the first game state, the initialization by the second means is performed together with the specific effect that is simulated in the situation where the first game state does not end. Therefore, the initialization by the second means is the initialization of the first update information, and the impression that the first gaming state has ended can be emphasized. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to feel the end of the first gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably arouse the joy and surprise of the player for the continuation of the first gaming state thereafter.

Feature D12. The first update means updates the first update information based on a predetermined update opportunity (change in the number of medals increase / decrease, game digestion in AT mode, etc.).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D11, wherein the second update information updates the second update information based on the predetermined update trigger.

In the above configuration, since the second update information is updated at the same timing as the first update information, the update behavior of the second update information can be made equal to the update behavior of the first update information. Thereby, the specific notification based on the update result of the second update means can be made to look like the notification based on the update result of the first update means. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the initialization by the second means is the initialization of the update result of the first update means, and it becomes possible to make it easy to think that the first game state has ended. ..

Feature D13. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41) in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the predetermined result. A game value-giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding game values (medals, credits, virtual game media) corresponding to the results, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D12.

By applying any of the configurations of the features D1 to D12 to the slot machine having the above configurations, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature D14. The gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state, and the player in the first gaming state. It is a gaming machine configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous for the game.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
A first game state end means (a function of ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
An update means (a function of executing a process for managing the difference number by the sub control device 81) for updating predetermined update information (sub difference number MY2) in the first game state, and
The specific notification execution means (function for executing the difference number display process by the sub control device 81) that executes the specific notification (difference number image 411) based on the update result of the update means, and
Initialization means for initializing the predetermined update information updated by the update means (processing for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81 according to the third embodiment, processing for clearing the second number of sub-differences) is executed. Function to do) and
Equipped with
The initialization means is
A first means (a function of executing a process for clearing the number of sub-differences by the sub-control device 81) for performing the initialization in response to the end of the first gaming state, and
A second means (process for clearing the second sub-difference number by the sub-control device 81) for performing the initialization when a predetermined specific condition (end of pseudo ending effect) is satisfied in a situation where the first game state is not terminated. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the first gaming state, for example, there is a gaming machine that updates updated information such as a difference number of sheets and performs specific notification based on the result so that the player can recognize it as his / her own achievement that he / she has won. In such a gaming machine, not only the first means for initializing the update result of the update information corresponding to the end of the first gaming state, but also the update information due to the establishment of a specific condition in the situation where the first gaming state does not end. It further provides a second means of initializing the update result. When the initialization is performed by each of these means, the notification corresponding to the initial value of the update information is performed as a specific notification. Therefore, by performing the initialization by the second means, the player is notified when the first gaming state is completed. The first gaming state can be continued after reminding. As a result, the joy and surprise of the player can be appropriately aroused, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It is possible to apply any configuration of the above features D2 to D13 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features D1 to D14, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C17, the features D1 to D14, and the features E1 to E11 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. As a game state, a first game state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (push order notification) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (push order bell prize) can be operated, and a first in which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (normal sections) and is configured to be able to play a specific state (AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to causing the transition to the specific state (when the AT mode or the like is won) or after the specific result is obtained, the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this is done (such as when the precursor mode has ended), the specific state transition means (function to execute the AT mode transition process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific state, and
A first game state transition means (a function of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
Update means for updating specific update information (advantageous section game number AG) based on a predetermined update opportunity (game digestion) in the first game state (advantageous section game number AG in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to execute the update process) and
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined specific result (upper limit number of games), the specific end means for ending the first game state (the number of advantageous section increase / decrease in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to end the advantageous section based on the update result of MY etc.) and
The specific effect executing means (ending effect by the sub control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment) capable of executing the specific effect (ending effect) as the effect corresponding to the end of the first gaming state by the specific end means. Function to execute setting process) and
Equipped with
The specific effect executing means is
When the first gaming state is terminated by the specific ending means, the first means (sub-difference number MY2) capable of executing the specific effect in the first gaming state (advantageous section A) to be terminated. Is a function that enables normal ending effects to be executed when the number of advantageous section games AG in the advantageous section A reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games is equal to or more than a predetermined number.
When the first gaming state is terminated by the specific ending means, it is possible to execute the specific effect in the first gaming state (advantageous section B) after the first gaming state to be terminated. Second means (when the number of sub-differences MY2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number of advantageous section games AG in the advantageous section A reaches the upper limit number of games, and then the number of sub-differences MY2 reaches the ending start number in the advantageous section B. (Function that enables pseudo ending effect) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the specific state advantageous to the player is shifted to the first game state in which the player can play. In the first game state, the update information is updated based on a predetermined update opportunity, and when the result becomes a specific result, the first game state is forcibly terminated by the specific end means. Since the specific effect is executed as the effect corresponding to the forced end, the player can recognize the end of the first gaming state due to the arrival of the upper limit through the execution of the effect. However, in such a gaming machine, the above-mentioned update result may become a specific result in a situation where the actual achievement such as the amount of acquisition of the gaming value is poor, and the first gaming state may be forcibly terminated. In such a case, there is a concern that the player may not be sufficiently satisfied with the game and a sense of accomplishment.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, when the first game state is terminated by the specific end means, the above-mentioned specific effect is executed in the first game state which is the end target, and the end target first. The above-mentioned specific effect may be executed in the first gaming state after the gaming state. According to this configuration, when the first game state is terminated in a situation where the achievement is insufficient, the specific effect can be carried over to the later first game state, so that the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. It will be possible to execute a specific effect after the situation becomes easy. Therefore, when the first game state is terminated by the specific termination means, the player can easily obtain the above-mentioned satisfaction and the like, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.)" of this feature can also be expressed as "specific state advantageous to the player (AT mode, etc.) rather than the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode)". ..

Feature E2. The means for causing the specific effect to be executed by the second means without executing the specific effect by the first means (processes of step S6001 and steps S3613 to S3617 by the sub-control device 81) are executed. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by having a function).

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is executed in the later first game state by the second means, the specific effect in the first first game state is not executed. That is, since the player is not notified of the end in the first game state before the end by the specific end means, it is possible to make the player feel that the first game state is continuing, and the effect of the above feature E1 is preferably applied. It will be possible to exert it.

Feature E3. A means for switching between the execution of the specific effect by the first means and the execution of the specific effect by the second means based on a predetermined specific condition (whether or not the main difference number MY1 is a predetermined number or more). The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, which comprises (a function of executing an ED determination process by the sub-control device 81).

In the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first gaming state of the end target and the subsequent first gaming state as the execution target of the specific effect based on the specific condition. In this case, for example, by setting a condition corresponding to the game performance as a specific condition, the execution of the specific effect is performed later in the first game according to the performance of the player in the first game state to be terminated. It becomes possible to switch whether or not to carry over to the state.

It should be noted that the present feature is "whether the specific effect is executed by the first means or the second means is determined by a predetermined specific condition (whether or not the main difference number MY1 is a predetermined number or more). It also has a means for determining based on (a function of executing the ED determination process by the sub control device 81). "

Feature E4. The specific condition is characterized in that the value of predetermined information (main difference number MY1, number of digested games in AT mode, etc.) corresponding to the game performance in the first gaming state is equal to or higher than the predetermined value. The gaming machine described in E3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to carry over the execution of the specific effect to the later first game state for the case where it is assumed that the achievement in the first game state that is the end target is insufficient.

Feature E5. The game value giving means (based on the main control device 101) that gives the game value (medals, credits, virtual game medium) when the predetermined grant condition (winning of a role with a medal payout such as a push order bell) is satisfied. Equipped with a function to execute payout judgment processing)
The specific state is a state in which the granting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the predetermined non-specific state (normal mode).
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the predetermined information is information corresponding to an increase / decrease in the gaming value in the first gaming state (main difference number MY1).

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific effect is carried over to the later first game state for the case where it is assumed that a sufficient amount of game value could not be obtained in the first game state that was the end target. Will be possible.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the predetermined information is information corresponding to the number of digestion games in the specific state (number of digestion games in AT mode).

According to the above configuration, in the case where it is assumed that the player could not fully enjoy the specific state in the first game state before the end target, the execution of the fixed effect is performed in the first game state afterwards. It will be possible to carry over to.

Feature E7. The second when the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes the specific result or shifts to the specific state within a predetermined number of games after the first gaming state is terminated by the specific end means. The game according to any one of the features E1 to E6, which comprises means (a function of executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6204 by the sub-control device 81) that enables the specific effect to be executed by the means. Machine.

For example, in the case where the interval from the end of the first gaming state by the specific termination means to the transition to the specific state in the subsequent first gaming state is widened, the opening of the interval widens the game medium (holding). There is a possibility that medals, etc.) have decreased significantly. In such a case, even if the specific effect is performed in the first game state later, there is a possibility that the player may have an impression that he / she is not very happy. In this respect, in this feature, after the first game state is terminated by the specific end means, when the specific state is won or the specific state is transferred within a predetermined number of games, that is, the specific state is set in a relatively short period of time. The structure is such that the specific production is carried over to the case where a prize is won. As a result, it is possible to perform a specific effect in a situation where the amount of the game medium is small and the player is likely to be pleased, and it is possible to suitably exert the effect of carrying over the specific effect.

Feature E8. The first update means as the update means and the first update means as the update means for updating the first update information as the specific update information based on the first update opportunity as the predetermined update opportunity.
Second update means (processing for managing the number of differences by the sub control device 81) for updating the second update information (sub difference number MY2) based on the second update trigger (change in the number of medals increase / decrease) different from the first update trigger. Function to execute) and
The specific notification execution means (function for executing the difference number display process by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification (difference number image 411) based on the update result of the second update means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E7.

In the above configuration, the second update information is provided separately from the first update information used for the end control of the first game state, and the specific notification is performed based on the update result of the second update information. That is, the result recognized by the player as a result is the update result of the second update information. At this time, since the update trigger differs between the first update information and the second update information, even if the update result of the first update information reaches the upper limit state corresponding to the end of the first game state, the second update information The update result may not have progressed to the extent that it satisfies the player's sense of accomplishment and satisfaction. In such a case, by applying the configuration of the above feature E1, it is suppressed that the player feels unsatisfactory when the first gaming state is terminated by the specific termination means, and it is easy to obtain satisfaction and the like. Can be.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the second updating means is configured to be able to update the second updating information across a plurality of the first gaming states.

According to the above configuration, when the specific effect is performed in the first game state after the first game state ended by the specific end means, the first first game to be ended in the first game state after that. It is possible to perform specific notification corresponding to the cumulative result from the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to notify the result that the player's satisfaction and the like can be easily elicited in the specific notification in the first gaming state later. Further, since the specific notification corresponds to the cumulative result from the first game state, the first game state continues even if the first game state is actually terminated by the specific end means. It is possible to give the impression of being, and to make it seem as if it was accomplished in the first gaming state of 1.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E9, wherein the specific update information is the number of digested games (advantageous section game number AG) in the first gaming state.

Since the number of digested games in the first game state progresses regardless of the profit situation received by the player, the number of digested games is the same as that of the first game state by the specific ending means without sufficiently securing the profit of the player. It is possible to reach the end value. In such a case, by applying the above-mentioned feature E1, it becomes possible to carry over to the first game state later and execute the specific effect, and it is possible to execute the specific effect after it becomes easy to obtain a feeling of satisfaction or the like. It will be possible.

Feature E11. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41) in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the predetermined result. A game value-giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding game values (medals, credits, virtual game media) corresponding to the results, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E10.

By applying any of the above-mentioned features E1 to E10 to the slot machine having the above-mentioned structure, it becomes possible to suitably exert each of the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features E1 to E11, the technical configuration shown by any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C17, the features D1 to D14, and the features E1 to E11 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature H group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature E group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component. When each of the above features is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, it can be understood that the game (1 game) related to each feature is variable (1 variable).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol row, and the symbol fluctuation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... slot machine, 32 ... reel, 41 ... start lever, 42 to 44 ... stop switch, 65 ... auxiliary display unit, 81 ... sub control device, 101 ... main control device.

Claims (6)

As the gaming state, there are a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated and a second gaming state in which the instruction function is not activated. A gaming machine configured to be able to play a specific state that is advantageous to the player in the first gaming state.
A specific determination means capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state, and a specific determination means.
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means becomes a specific result corresponding to the transition to the specific state, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific result is obtained, the specific state is transferred to the specific state. Specific state transition means and
A first game state transition means for shifting the game state to the first game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and
A first game state end means for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a first game state end means.
A second gaming state transition means for shifting to the second gaming state when the first gaming state is terminated by the first gaming state ending means, and
When the specific state is executed in the first game state and the specific state is executed in the first game state after the transition after the end of the first game state, the first game state after the first game state is executed. The specific notification that the player can recognize that the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the above-mentioned specific state is related to the notification content in the specific state or the specific state in the first gaming state. Specific measures that can be taken and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The first aspect of the present invention is characterized in that the specific means can execute the specific notification straddling the specific state in the first gaming state and the specific state in the subsequent first gaming state. Gaming machine. The specific means is characterized by comprising means capable of executing the specific notification in the second game state between the first game state and the first game state after the first game state. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or claim 2. A game value-giving means for adding a predetermined game value when the specific prize is established is provided.
The specific state is a state in which the instruction function is more likely to operate than a predetermined non-specific state.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the number of increase / decrease in game value or the number of executed games in the specific state. The specific means is the first increase / decrease number, which is the increase / decrease number when the specific state in the first game state is completed, as the specific notification in the specific state in the first game state after that. Alternatively, the number of increases / decreases during the period from the end of the specific state in the first game state to the time when the specific state is performed in the subsequent first game state is added to the first increase / decrease number. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the subsequent notification can be executed according to the number of increase / decrease. An update means for updating a predetermined update information based on a predetermined update opportunity, and
A holding means capable of holding the update result of the update means without initializing even after the first game state is completed, and a holding means.
After the holding is performed by the holding means, the update continuation means for continuing the update based on the predetermined update opportunity for the held update result, and the update continuation means.
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the specific means can execute specific notification based on the update result.

Images